HP Hewlett Packard OFFICEJET PRO L7500 User Manual
HP Officejet Pro  
L7300/L7500/L7600/L7700  
User Guide  
HP Officejet Pro L7300/L7500/  
L7600/L7700 All-in-One series  
User Guide  
Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the  
scanner (< 1.5 mg)  
Copyright information  
© 2007 Copyright Hewlett-Packard  
Development Company, L.P.  
Copy limitations  
It is not lawful in many places to make  
copies of the following items. When in  
doubt, check with a legal  
For recycling information, contact  
http://www.hp.com/go/recycle, local  
authorities, or the Electronics  
Industries Alliance at http://  
www.eiae.org.  
Edition 1, 10/2006  
representative first.  
Reproduction, adaptation or  
Governmental paper or  
documents:  
•
translation without prior written  
permission is prohibited, except as  
allowed under the copyright laws.  
For more information, see Recycling.  
Passports  
•
The information contained herein is  
subject to change without notice.  
Immigration papers  
•
Selective service papers  
•
The only warranties for HP products  
and services are set forth in the  
express warranty statements  
Identification badges, cards,  
or insignias  
•
accompanying such products and  
services. Nothing herein should be  
construed as constituting an  
Governmental stamps:  
•
Postage stamps  
•
additional warranty. HP shall not be  
liable for technical or editorial errors  
or omissions contained herein.  
Food stamps  
•
Checks or drafts drawn on  
governmental agencies  
•
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data  
Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights  
reserved.  
Paper currency, traveler's  
checks, or money orders  
•
Certificates of deposit  
•
•
License to copy and use this software  
is granted provided that it is identified  
as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4  
Message-Digest Algorithm" in all  
material mentioning or referencing  
this software or this function.  
Copyrighted works  
Safety information  
License is also granted to make and  
use derivative works provided that  
such works are identified as "derived  
from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4  
Message-Digest Algorithm" in all  
material mentioning or referencing the  
derived work.  
Always follow basic safety  
precautions when using this product  
to reduce risk of injury from fire or  
electric shock.  
1. Read and understand all  
instructions in the documentation that  
comes with the HP All-in-One.  
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no  
representations concerning either the  
merchantability of this software or the  
suitability of this software for any  
particular purpose. It is provided "as  
is" without express or implied  
2. Use only a grounded electrical  
outlet when connecting this product to  
a power source. If you do not know  
whether the outlet is grounded, check  
with a qualified electrician.  
warranty of any kind.  
3. Observe all warnings and  
instructions marked on the product.  
These notices must be retained in any  
copies of any part of this  
documentation and/or software.  
4. Unplug this product from wall  
outlets before cleaning.  
5. Do not install or use this product  
near water, or when you are wet.  
Trademarks  
Intel®, Pentium® is a registered  
trademark of Intel Corporation or its  
subsidiaries in the United States and  
other countries.  
6. Install the product securely on a  
stable surface.  
7. Install the product in a protected  
location where no one can step on or  
trip over the line cord, and the line  
cord cannot be damaged.  
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows®  
XP are U.S. registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation.  
8. If the product does not operate  
normally, see Maintain and  
troubleshoot.  
9. There are no user-serviceable parts  
inside. Refer servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
Secure Digital  
memory card is supported by the  
product. SD Logo is a trademark of its  
proprietor.  
Product restricted material  
This HP product contains the  
following material that might require  
special handling at end-of-life:  
Contents  
1
Get started  
Find other resources for the product .......................................................................................10  
Accessibility ............................................................................................................................11  
Understand the HP All-in-One parts .......................................................................................12  
Front view .........................................................................................................................13  
Printing supplies area .......................................................................................................14  
Memory card slots ............................................................................................................14  
Back view .........................................................................................................................15  
Control panel ....................................................................................................................15  
Control panel buttons and lights .................................................................................16  
Color display ...............................................................................................................18  
Two-line display ..........................................................................................................19  
Connection information .....................................................................................................19  
2
3
Install the accessories  
Install the duplexer .................................................................................................................21  
Install Tray 2 ...........................................................................................................................21  
Turn on accessories in the print driver ....................................................................................22  
To turn on accessories on Windows computers ...............................................................23  
To turn on accessories on Macintosh computers .............................................................. 23  
Use the all-in-one  
Use control panel menus ........................................................................................................24  
Control-panel message types .................................................................................................25  
Status messages ..............................................................................................................25  
Warning messages ...........................................................................................................25  
Error messages ................................................................................................................25  
Critical error messages .....................................................................................................25  
Change device settings ..........................................................................................................25  
Use the HP Solution Center (Windows) ..................................................................................26  
Use the HP photo and imaging software ................................................................................26  
Text and symbols ...................................................................................................................28  
Type numbers and text on the control-panel keypad ........................................................28  
To enter text ................................................................................................................ 28  
To enter a space, pause, or symbol ............................................................................28  
To erase a letter, number, or symbol ..........................................................................28  
Type text using the visual keyboard (some models only) .................................................29  
Available symbols for dialing fax numbers (some models only) ........................................30  
Load the originals ...................................................................................................................30  
Load an original in the automatic document feeder (ADF) ................................................30  
Load an original on the scanner glass ..............................................................................31  
1
Select print media ...................................................................................................................32  
Tips for selecting and using print media ...........................................................................32  
Understand specifications for supported media ................................................................33  
Understand supported sizes .......................................................................................33  
Understand supported media types and weights ........................................................36  
Set minimum margins .......................................................................................................37  
Load media .............................................................................................................................37  
Configure trays .......................................................................................................................40  
Print on special and custom-sized media ...............................................................................41  
To print on special or custom-sized media (Windows) ......................................................41  
To print on special or custom-sized media (Mac OS) .......................................................41  
Print borderless ......................................................................................................................42  
To print a borderless document (Windows) ......................................................................42  
To print a borderless document (Mac OS) ........................................................................43  
Set up speed-dial entries (some models only) ........................................................................43  
Set up fax numbers as speed-dial entries or groups ......................................................... 43  
To set up speed-dial entries ........................................................................................ 44  
To set up a speed-dial group ......................................................................................44  
Set up network folders as speed-dial entries (some models) ...........................................45  
To set up speed-dial entries ........................................................................................ 45  
Print and view a list of speed-dial entries ..........................................................................46  
To print a list of speed-dial entries ..............................................................................46  
To view a list of speed-dial entries ..............................................................................46  
4
Print  
Change print settings ..............................................................................................................47  
To change settings from an application for current jobs (Windows) ..................................47  
To change default settings for all future jobs (Windows) ..................................................47  
To change settings (Mac OS) ...........................................................................................47  
Print on both sides (duplexing) ...............................................................................................48  
Guidelines for printing on both sides of a page .................................................................48  
To perform duplexing (Windows) ......................................................................................48  
To perform automatic duplexing (Mac OS) .......................................................................49  
Cancel a print job ....................................................................................................................49  
5
6
Copy  
Make copies from the control panel ........................................................................................50  
Change the copy settings .......................................................................................................50  
Crop an original (color display models only) ...........................................................................50  
Cancel a copy job ...................................................................................................................51  
Scan  
Scan an original ......................................................................................................................52  
Set up Direct Digital Filing (some models only) ................................................................52  
Scan an original to a network folder ..................................................................................53  
Scan an original to a program on a computer (direct connection) .....................................54  
Scan an original to a memory device ................................................................................55  
Use Webscan via embedded Web server ...............................................................................55  
Scan from a TWAIN-compliant or a WIA-compliant program ..................................................55  
To scan from a TWAIN-compliant program ......................................................................56  
To scan from a WIA-compliant program ...........................................................................56  
2
Contents  
Edit a scanned original ...........................................................................................................56  
Edit a scanned photo or graphic .......................................................................................56  
Edit a scanned document using optical character recognition (OCR) software ................56  
Change scan settings .............................................................................................................57  
Cancel a scan job ...................................................................................................................57  
7
Work with memory devices (some models only)  
Insert a memory card ..............................................................................................................58  
Connect a digital camera ........................................................................................................59  
Connect a storage device .......................................................................................................61  
View photos ............................................................................................................................62  
View photos (color display models only) ...........................................................................62  
View photos using your computer .....................................................................................62  
Print photos from the control panel .........................................................................................62  
Print photos using a proof sheet .......................................................................................62  
Print panoramic photos .....................................................................................................65  
Print passport photos ........................................................................................................66  
Print video action photos ..................................................................................................67  
Save photos to your computer ................................................................................................68  
8
Fax (some models only)  
Send a fax ..............................................................................................................................70  
Send a basic fax ...............................................................................................................70  
Send a fax manually from a phone ...................................................................................71  
Send a fax using monitor dialing .......................................................................................72  
Send a fax using the broadcast fax option (color display models only) .............................73  
Receive a fax ..........................................................................................................................73  
Receive a fax manually .....................................................................................................73  
Set up backup fax reception .............................................................................................74  
Reprint received faxes from memory ................................................................................75  
Forward faxes to another number .....................................................................................76  
Block junk fax numbers .....................................................................................................77  
Set the junk fax mode .................................................................................................77  
Add numbers to the junk fax list ..................................................................................77  
Remove numbers from the junk fax list .......................................................................78  
View a list of blocked fax numbers ..............................................................................78  
Change fax settings ................................................................................................................79  
Configure the fax header ..................................................................................................79  
Set the answer mode (Auto answer) .................................................................................79  
Set the number of rings before answering ........................................................................80  
Change the answer ring pattern for distinctive ring ...........................................................80  
Set the fax error correction mode .....................................................................................81  
To set the fax error-correction mode ...........................................................................81  
Set the dial type ................................................................................................................81  
To set the dial type .....................................................................................................81  
Set the redial options ........................................................................................................81  
To set the redial options .............................................................................................82  
Set the fax speed ..............................................................................................................82  
Fax over the Internet ............................................................................................................... 82  
Test fax setup .........................................................................................................................83  
3
Use reports .............................................................................................................................83  
Print fax confirmation reports ............................................................................................84  
Print fax error reports ........................................................................................................84  
Print and view the fax log ..................................................................................................85  
Cancel a fax ............................................................................................................................85  
9
Configure and manage  
Manage the device .................................................................................................................86  
Overview of management tasks ........................................................................................ 86  
Monitor the device ............................................................................................................87  
Administer the device .......................................................................................................88  
Use device management tools ...............................................................................................90  
Embedded Web server .....................................................................................................90  
To open the embedded Web server ...........................................................................90  
Embedded Web server pages ....................................................................................91  
Toolbox (Windows) ...........................................................................................................91  
To open the Toolbox ...................................................................................................91  
Toolbox tabs ...............................................................................................................92  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS) ...............................................................................................93  
To open the HP Printer Utility .....................................................................................93  
HP Printer Utility panels ..............................................................................................93  
Network Printer Setup Utility (Mac OS) .............................................................................94  
HP Web Jetadmin software ..............................................................................................94  
HP Instant Support ...........................................................................................................94  
Security and privacy ...................................................................................................95  
To gain access to HP Instant Support ........................................................................95  
myPrintMileage .................................................................................................................95  
Understand the self-test diagnostic page ................................................................................96  
Understand the network configuration page ...........................................................................98  
Channel range definitions .................................................................................................99  
Configure network options ......................................................................................................99  
Change basic network settings .........................................................................................99  
Use the Wireless Setup Wizard ................................................................................100  
View and print network settings ................................................................................100  
Turn the wireless radio on and off .............................................................................100  
Change advanced network settings ................................................................................100  
Set link speed ...........................................................................................................100  
To View IP settings ...................................................................................................101  
To Change IP settings ..............................................................................................101  
4
Contents  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only) ..................................................................101  
Set up faxing (parallel phone systems) ...........................................................................102  
Choose the correct fax setup for your home or office ...............................................102  
Select your fax setup case ........................................................................................104  
Case A: Separate fax line (no voice calls received) ..................................................105  
Case B: Set up the device with DSL .........................................................................106  
Case C: Set up the device with a PBX phone system or an ISDN line .....................107  
Case D: Fax with a distinctive ring service on the same line ....................................108  
Case E: Shared voice/fax line ...................................................................................109  
Case F: Shared voice/fax line with voice mail ...........................................................110  
Case G: Fax line shared with computer modem (no voice calls received) ................111  
Case H: Shared voice/fax line with computer modem ..............................................113  
Case I: Shared voice/fax line with answering machine .............................................117  
Case J: Shared voice/fax line with computer modem and answering machine .........118  
Case K: Shared voice/fax line with computer dial-up modem and voice mail ...........122  
Serial-type fax setup .......................................................................................................124  
Configure the device (Windows) ...........................................................................................125  
Direct connection ............................................................................................................125  
To install the software before connecting the device (recommended) ......................125  
To connect the device before installing the software ................................................126  
To share the device on a locally shared network ......................................................126  
Network connection ........................................................................................................127  
To install the device on a network .............................................................................127  
To install the device software on client computers ....................................................127  
To install the printer driver using Add Printer ............................................................128  
Configure the device (Mac OS) ............................................................................................128  
To install the software for network or direct connection ..................................................128  
To share the device on a locally shared network ............................................................129  
Set up the device for wireless communication (some models only) ......................................129  
Understand 802.11 wireless network settings ................................................................. 130  
To set up wireless communication using the control panel with wireless setup wizard ...131  
To set up wireless communication using the installer (Windows) ...................................132  
To set up wireless communication using SecureEasySetup (SES) ................................133  
To set up the device on a wireless network (Mac OS) ....................................................133  
To turn off wireless communication ................................................................................134  
Guidelines for reducing interference on a wireless network ............................................134  
Guidelines for ensuring wireless network security ..........................................................134  
To add hardware addresses to a WAP .....................................................................134  
Other guidelines ........................................................................................................135  
Set up the device for Bluetooth communication ....................................................................135  
To set up the device for Bluetooth communication via the embedded Web server .........136  
Connect the device with Bluetooth .................................................................................. 136  
Connecting the device with Bluetooth on Windows ..................................................136  
Connect the device with Bluetooth on Mac OS .........................................................138  
Set Bluetooth security for the device ..............................................................................138  
Use a passkey to authenticate Bluetooth devices .....................................................139  
To set the device to be visible or not visible to Bluetooth devices ............................139  
Reset Bluetooth settings via the embedded Web server ..........................................140  
Uninstall and reinstall the software .......................................................................................140  
5
10 Maintain and troubleshoot  
Supported ink cartridges .......................................................................................................143  
Replace the ink cartridges ....................................................................................................144  
Maintain the printheads ........................................................................................................145  
To check printhead health ..............................................................................................145  
To print the print quality diagnostic page ........................................................................145  
To align the printheads ...................................................................................................146  
To calibrate the linefeed .................................................................................................147  
To clean the printheads ..................................................................................................147  
To clean the printhead contacts manually ......................................................................147  
To replace the printheads ...............................................................................................150  
Store printing supplies ..........................................................................................................152  
Store ink cartridges .........................................................................................................152  
Store printheads .............................................................................................................152  
Clean the device ...................................................................................................................152  
Clean the scanner glass .................................................................................................153  
Clean the automatic document feeder (ADF) .................................................................. 153  
Clean the exterior ...........................................................................................................157  
Troubleshooting tips and resources ......................................................................................157  
Solve printing problems ........................................................................................................158  
The device shuts down unexpectedly .............................................................................158  
Error message appears on control-panel display ............................................................ 158  
The device is not responding (nothing prints) .................................................................158  
Device does not accept printhead ................................................................................... 159  
Device takes a long time to print .....................................................................................160  
Blank or partial page printed ...........................................................................................160  
Something on the page is missing or incorrect ...............................................................161  
Placement of the text or graphics is wrong .....................................................................161  
The device prints half a page, then ejects the paper ......................................................162  
Poor print quality and unexpected printouts ..........................................................................162  
Poor quality printouts ......................................................................................................162  
Meaningless characters print ..........................................................................................163  
Ink is smearing ................................................................................................................ 163  
Ink is not filling the text or graphics completely ...............................................................164  
Output is faded or dull colored ........................................................................................164  
Colors are printing as black and white ............................................................................164  
Wrong colors are printing ................................................................................................164  
Printout shows bleeding colors .......................................................................................165  
Colors do not line up properly .........................................................................................165  
Lines or dots are missing from text or graphics ..............................................................165  
Solve paper-feed problems ...................................................................................................165  
Optional Tray 2 cannot be inserted .................................................................................165  
Another paper-feed problem is occurring ........................................................................165  
6
Contents  
Solve copy problems ............................................................................................................167  
No copy came out ...........................................................................................................167  
Copies are blank .............................................................................................................167  
Wrong original was copied ..............................................................................................167  
Documents are missing or faded ....................................................................................168  
Size is reduced ...............................................................................................................168  
Copy quality is poor ........................................................................................................168  
Copy defects are apparent .............................................................................................168  
Error messages appear ..................................................................................................169  
The device prints half a page, then ejects the paper ......................................................169  
Solve scan problems ............................................................................................................169  
Scanner did nothing ........................................................................................................170  
Scan takes too long ........................................................................................................170  
Part of the document did not scan or text is missing .......................................................170  
Text cannot be edited .....................................................................................................171  
Error messages appear ..................................................................................................171  
Scanned image quality is poor ........................................................................................171  
Scan defects are apparent ..............................................................................................173  
Unable to scan to network folder (Direct Digital Filing) ...................................................173  
Solve fax problems ...............................................................................................................174  
The fax test failed ...........................................................................................................174  
Solve photo (memory card) problems ...................................................................................185  
The device cannot read the memory card ......................................................................186  
The device cannot read photos on the memory card ......................................................186  
Some photos on the memory card will not print, causing the print job to cancel .............186  
The device prints half a page, then ejects the paper ......................................................187  
Solve device management problems ....................................................................................187  
Embedded Web server cannot be opened .....................................................................187  
Troubleshoot installation issues ............................................................................................188  
Hardware installation suggestions ..................................................................................188  
Software installation suggestions .................................................................................... 188  
Solve alignment page problems ...................................................................................... 189  
Solve software installation problems ...............................................................................189  
Solve network problems .................................................................................................190  
Solve wireless problems .................................................................................................191  
Clear jams ............................................................................................................................192  
Clear a jam in the device ................................................................................................193  
Clear jams in the ADF .....................................................................................................195  
Tips for avoiding jams .....................................................................................................197  
A
B
HP supplies and accessories  
Order printing supplies online ...............................................................................................198  
Accessories ..........................................................................................................................198  
Supplies ................................................................................................................................198  
Ink cartridges ..................................................................................................................198  
Printheads ......................................................................................................................199  
HP media ........................................................................................................................199  
Support and warranty  
Obtain electronic support ......................................................................................................200  
7
Obtain HP telephone support ...............................................................................................200  
Before you call ................................................................................................................200  
Telephone support numbers ...........................................................................................201  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement .........................................................................203  
Prepare the device for shipment ...........................................................................................204  
Remove the ink cartridges and printheads before shipment ...........................................204  
Remove the control-panel faceplate ...............................................................................205  
Pack the device ....................................................................................................................206  
C
Device specifications  
Physical specifications ..........................................................................................................208  
Product features and capacities ...........................................................................................208  
Processor and memory specifications ..................................................................................209  
System requirements ............................................................................................................209  
Network protocol specifications ............................................................................................210  
Embedded Web server specifications ................................................................................... 210  
Print specifications ................................................................................................................210  
Print resolution ................................................................................................................210  
Copy specifications ...............................................................................................................211  
Fax specifications .................................................................................................................211  
Scan specifications ...............................................................................................................212  
Direct Digital Filing specifications .........................................................................................212  
Environmental specifications ................................................................................................212  
Electrical specifications .........................................................................................................212  
Acoustic emission specifications (print in Draft mode, noise levels per ISO 7779) ...............212  
Supported devices ................................................................................................................213  
Memory card specifications ..................................................................................................213  
D
Regulatory information  
FCC statement .....................................................................................................................214  
Shielded cables ..............................................................................................................214  
Exposure to radio frequency radiation (wireless products only) ......................................215  
Notice to users of the U.S. telephone network ................................................................216  
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network .............................................................217  
Notice to users in the European Economic Area ..................................................................218  
Other regulatory information .................................................................................................218  
EMI statement (Korea) ....................................................................................................218  
VCCI statement (Japan) .................................................................................................219  
Regulatory model number ..............................................................................................219  
Power cord statement .....................................................................................................219  
LED classification ...........................................................................................................219  
Regulatory information for wireless products ........................................................................219  
Notice to users in Canada/Note à l'attention des utilisateurs Canadien ..........................220  
Notice to users in Brazil/Notificação de Normas de Uso de Dispositivos Sem Fio do  
Brasil ...............................................................................................................................220  
Notice to users in the European Union (English) ............................................................221  
Notice to users in France ................................................................................................222  
Notice to users in Germany ............................................................................................223  
Notice to users in Italy ....................................................................................................224  
Notice to users in Spain ..................................................................................................225  
Declaration of conformity ......................................................................................................226  
8
Contents  
Environmental sustainability program ...................................................................................228  
Reduction and elimination ..............................................................................................228  
Power consumption ........................................................................................................228  
Battery information ..........................................................................................................228  
Material safety data sheets .............................................................................................229  
Recycling ........................................................................................................................229  
Product packaging ....................................................................................................229  
Plastics .....................................................................................................................229  
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European  
Union ........................................................................................................................229  
HP products and supplies .........................................................................................229  
Index...........................................................................................................................................230  
9
1 Get started  
This guide provides details about how to use the device and to resolve problems.  
•
•
•
Find other resources for the product  
Accessibility  
Understand the HP All-in-One parts  
Find other resources for the product  
You can obtain product information and further troubleshooting resources that are not  
included in this guide from the following resources:  
Resource  
Description  
Location  
Provides illustrated setup  
information.  
A printed version of the  
document is provided with  
the device.  
Setup poster  
Getting started guide  
Provides instructions for  
setting up the device and  
information about the  
A printed version of the  
document is provided with  
the device.  
warranty and safety issues.  
Provide late-breaking  
information and  
Included on the Starter CD.  
Readme file and release notes  
troubleshooting tips.  
Embedded Web server  
(network connection)  
Allows you to view status  
Available through any  
standard Web browser.  
information, change settings,  
and manage the device from  
any computer on the network.  
For more information, see  
Embedded Web server.  
Toolbox (Microsoft®  
Windows®)  
Provides information about  
printhead health and access  
to maintenance services.  
The Toolbox is typically  
installed with the device  
software as an available  
installation option.  
For more information, see  
Toolbox (Windows).  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS)  
Contains tools to configure  
print settings, calibrate the  
device, clean the printheads,  
print the configuration page,  
order supplies online, and  
find support information from  
the Web site. You can also  
configure settings for  
The HP Printer Utility is  
typically installed with the  
device software.  
wireless printing.  
For more information, see HP  
Printer Utility (Mac OS).  
10  
Get started  
           
(continued)  
Resource  
Description  
Location  
HP Instant Support  
Helps you quickly identify,  
diagnose, and resolve  
printing problems.  
Available through any  
standard Web browser or  
through the Toolbox  
(Windows).  
For more information, see HP  
Instant Support.  
Control panel  
Provides status, error, and  
warning information about  
operations.  
For more information, see  
Control panel.  
Logs and reports  
Provides information about  
events that have occurred.  
For more information, see  
Monitor the device.  
Self-test diagnostic page  
Device information:  
For more information, see  
Understand the self-test  
diagnostic page.  
•
Product name  
Model number  
Serial number  
•
•
•
•
Firmware version  
number  
Accessories installed (for  
example, the duplexer)  
•
•
Number of pages printed  
from the trays and  
accessories  
Ink levels  
•
•
Printhead health status  
Network configuration page  
Print quality diagnostic page  
Provides network  
configuration information.  
For more information, see  
Understand the network  
configuration page.  
Diagnoses issues that affect  
print quality and helps you  
decide whether to run any  
maintenance tools to improve  
the print quality of your  
printouts.  
For more information, see To  
print the print quality  
diagnostic page.  
HP Web sites  
Provide the latest printer  
software, and product and  
support information.  
www.hp.com/support  
www.hp.com  
HP telephone support  
Lists information to contact  
HP. During the warranty  
period, this support is often  
free of charge.  
For more information, see  
Obtain HP telephone support.  
HP photo and imaging  
software help  
Provides information about  
using the software.  
For more information, see  
Use the HP photo and  
imaging software.  
Accessibility  
The device provides a number of features that make it accessible for people with  
disabilities.  
11  
Accessibility  
   
Chapter 1  
Visual  
The device software is accessible for users with visual impairments or low vision  
through the use of your operating system's accessibility options and features. It also  
supports most assistive technology such as screen readers, Braille readers, and voice-  
to-text applications. For users who are color blind, colored buttons and tabs used in  
the software and on the control panel have simple text or icon labels that convey the  
appropriate action.  
Mobility  
For users with mobility impairments, the device software functions can be executed  
through keyboard commands. The software also supports Windows accessibility  
options such as StickyKeys, ToggleKeys, FilterKeys, and MouseKeys. The device  
doors, buttons, paper trays, and paper guides can be operated by users with limited  
strength and reach.  
Support  
For more details about the accessibility of this product and HP's commitment to  
product accessibility, visit HP's Web site at www.hp.com/accessibility.  
For accessibility information for the Mac OS, visit the Apple Web site at  
www.apple.com/accessibility.  
Understand the HP All-in-One parts  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Front view  
Printing supplies area  
Memory card slots  
Back view  
Control panel  
Connection information  
12  
Get started  
   
Front view  
1
Automatic document feeder (ADF)  
2
Scanner glass  
3
Control panel (differs based on the HP All-in-One model that you have)  
4
Display (differs based on the model that you have)  
Output tray  
5
6
Output tray extension  
7
Length/width guides  
8
Tray 1  
9
Tray 2 (available with some models)  
Front universal serial bus (USB) port (PictBridge-enabled)  
Memory card slots  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Memory device light  
Document feeder tray  
Width guides  
Understand the HP All-in-One parts  
13  
   
Chapter 1  
Printing supplies area  
1
2
3
4
5
Ink cartridge door  
Ink cartridges  
Print-carriage access door  
Printheads  
Printhead latch  
Memory card slots  
1
2
3
4
5
CompactFlash (types I and II)  
Secure Digital, MultimediaCard (MMC), Secure MMC  
xD  
Memory Stick, Magic Gate Memory Stick, Memory Stick Duo, Memory Stick Pro  
Front universal serial bus (USB) port (PictBridge-enabled)  
14  
Get started  
               
Back view  
1
Power input  
2
3
4
5
6
Ethernet network port  
Rear universal serial bus (USB) port  
Fax ports (1-LINE and 2-EXT) (available on some models)  
Rear access panel (for models with no duplexer)  
Automatic two-sided printing accessory (duplexer) (available on some models)  
Control panel  
The layout and functions available on the control panel depend on which model that  
you have.  
The following sections describe control panel buttons, lights, and displays. Your model  
might not have all of the features described.  
Understand the HP All-in-One parts  
15  
     
Chapter 1  
Control panel buttons and lights  
The following diagram and related table provide a quick reference to the control panel  
features.  
Label  
Name and Description  
1
2
3
4
One-touch speed-dial buttons: Access the first five speed-dial numbers.  
Speed Dial: Selects a speed-dial number.  
Scan Menu: Presents the Scan To menu for selecting a scan destination.  
Digital Filing: Scans and saves a document to a folder and shares documents with other  
people on your network.  
5
6
Fax Menu: Presents the Fax menu for selecting options.  
The button name and functionality depends on the country/region in which the device is sold.  
Resolution: Adjusts the resolution for the fax you are sending.  
Junk Fax Blocker: Presents the Junk Fax Blocker Set Up menu for managing unwanted fax  
calls. You are required to subscribe to a caller ID service to use this feature.  
7
Keypad: Enters fax numbers, values, or text.  
Display: View menus and messages.  
8
9
Left arrow: Decreases values on the display.  
OK: Selects a menu or a setting on the display.  
Right arrow: Increases values on the display.  
10  
11  
12  
Attention light: When blinking, the attention light indicates an error has occurred that requires  
your attention.  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Reduce/Enlarge: Changes the size of a copy for printing.  
Copy Menu: Presents the Copy menu for selecting options.  
Number of Copies: Select the number of copies to be printed.  
Photo Menu: Presents the Photo menu for selecting options.  
16  
Get started  
                                 
(continued)  
Label  
Name and Description  
17  
The button name and functionality depends on the model and the country/region in which the  
device is sold.  
Proof Sheet: Prints a proof sheet when a memory card is inserted in a memory card slot. A  
proof sheet shows thumbnail views of all the photos on the memory card. You can select  
photos on the proof sheet, and then print those photos by scanning the proof sheet.  
Rotate: Rotate the current image on the display. The rotated image can be printed.  
18  
Power: Turns the device on or off. The Power button is lit when the device is on. The light  
blinks while performing a job.  
When the device is turned off, a minimal amount of power is still supplied. To completely  
disconnect the power supply, turn the device off, and then unplug the power cord.  
19  
20  
21  
Zoom Out: Reduces the size of the image on the display.  
Zoom In: Increases the size of the image on the display.  
PRINT PHOTOS: Selects the photo function. Use this button to print photos from a memory  
card or storage device, or to save photos to your computer.  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
Quality: Selects Best, Normal, or Fast quality for copying.  
START COPY Color: Starts a color copy job.  
START COPY Black: Starts a black-and-white copy job.  
Collate: Organizes the copies in order so they are ready to use when the copying job finishes.  
Cancel: Stops a job, exits a menu, or exits settings.  
Help: Displays the Help menu. You can choose from a list of help topics. When you make a  
selection, the detailed help information is displayed on the monitor of a connected computer.  
28  
29  
30  
Back: Moves you one level up in the menu.  
2-sided: Performs a two-sided copy or fax job.  
Setup: Presents the Setup Menu for generating reports, changing fax and other maintenance  
settings, and accessing the Help menu. The topic that you select from the Help menu opens  
a help window on your computer screen.  
31  
Auto Answer: When this button is lit, the device automatically answers incoming phone  
calls. When off, the device does not answer any incoming fax calls.  
32  
33  
34  
START FAX Color: Starts a color fax.  
START FAX Black: Starts a black-and-white fax.  
Redial/Pause: Redials the most recently dialed number, or inserts a 3-second pause in a fax  
number.  
35  
START SCAN: Starts a scan job and sends it to the destination you selected using the Scan  
To button.  
Understand the HP All-in-One parts  
17  
                                     
Chapter 1  
Color display  
NOTE: This type of display is available on some models.  
The following icons appear at the bottom of the color display to provide important  
information. Some of the icons appear only if your device has network capability. For  
more information about networking, see Configure network options.  
Icon  
Purpose  
Shows the amount of ink in the ink cartridge. The color of the icon  
corresponds to the color of the ink cartridge, and the fill level of the icon  
corresponds to the fill level of the ink cartridge.  
Shows that an unknown ink cartridge is inserted. This icon might appear if an  
ink cartridge contains non-HP ink.  
Shows that a wired network connection exists.  
Shows that the device has wireless networking capability, but no wireless  
network connection exists. This icon is gray when a wireless network signal is  
not available, and blue when a signal exists. This is for infrastructure mode.  
(This feature is supported on some models.) For more information, see Set up  
the device for wireless communication (some models only).  
Shows that a wireless network connection exists. The signal strength is  
indicated by the number of curved lines. This is for infrastructure mode. (This  
feature is supported on some models.) For more information, see Set up the  
device for wireless communication (some models only).  
Shows that an ad hoc, or computer-to-computer, wireless network connection  
exists. (This feature is supported on some models.) For more information, see  
Set up the device for wireless communication (some models only).  
Shows that a Bluetooth adapter is installed, and a connection exists. A  
separate Bluetooth adapter is required. For more information, see Accessories.  
For more information on setting up Bluetooth, see Guidelines for ensuring  
wireless network security.  
18  
Get started  
           
Two-line display  
NOTE: This type of display is available on some models.  
The two-line display shows status and error messages, menu options, and advisory  
messages. If you insert a memory card or connect a camera, the display goes into  
photo state and shows the top of the Photo menu.  
Connection information  
Description  
Recommended  
Supported software  
features  
Setup instructions  
number of connected  
computers for best  
performance  
USB connection  
One computer  
All features are  
supported, except  
Webscan. For  
information, see Use  
Webscan via embedded  
Web server.  
Follow the getting  
started guide for  
detailed instructions.  
connected with a USB  
cable to the rear USB  
2.0 high-speed port on  
the device.  
Ethernet (wired)  
connection  
Up to five computers  
connected to the device  
using a hub or router.  
All features are  
supported, including  
Webscan.  
Follow the instructions  
in the getting started  
guide, and then see To  
share the device on a  
locally shared network  
in this guide for further  
instructions.  
Printer sharing  
802.11 wireless  
Up to five computers.  
All features resident on  
the host computer are  
supported. Only print is  
supported from the  
other computers.  
Follow the instructions  
in To share the device  
on a locally shared  
network.  
The host computer must  
be turned on at all  
times, or the other  
computers cannot print  
to the device.  
Up to five computers  
connected to the device  
using a hub or router.  
All features are  
supported, including  
Webscan.  
Follow the instructions  
in Set up the device for  
wireless communication  
(some models only).  
HP bt300, Printer and  
PC Adapter with  
One Bluetooth device or Printing from a  
computer. Bluetooth device such  
Follow the instructions  
in Set up the device for  
Understand the HP All-in-One parts  
19  
             
Chapter 1  
Description  
Recommended  
Supported software  
features  
Setup instructions  
number of connected  
computers for best  
performance  
Bluetooth® Wireless  
Technology  
as a PDA, camera  
phone, or Bluetooth-  
enabled computer.  
Bluetooth  
communication.  
20  
Get started  
 
2
Install the accessories  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
•
Install the duplexer  
Install Tray 2  
Turn on accessories in the print driver  
Install the duplexer  
NOTE: This feature is available with some models of the device.  
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper automatically when the optional  
automatic two-sided printing accessory (duplexer) is installed. For information on using  
the duplexer, see Print on both sides (duplexing).  
To install the duplexer  
1. Push the buttons on the rear access panel and remove the panel from the device.  
2. Slide the duplexer into the device until the unit locks into place. Do not press the  
buttons on either side of the duplexer when installing the unit; use them only for  
removing the unit from the device.  
Install Tray 2  
NOTE: This feature is available with some models of the device.  
21  
Install the accessories  
           
Chapter 2  
Tray 2 can hold up to 350 sheets of plain paper. For ordering information, see  
Accessories.  
To install Tray 2  
1. Unpack the tray, remove the packing tapes and materials, and move the tray to the  
prepared location. The surface must be sturdy and level.  
2. Turn off the device, and disconnect the power cord.  
3. Set the device on top of the tray.  
CAUTION: Be careful to keep your fingers and hands clear of the bottom of  
the device.  
4. Connect the power cord and turn on the device.  
5. Enable Tray 2 in the print driver. For more information, see Turn on accessories in  
the print driver.  
Turn on accessories in the print driver  
•
To turn on accessories on Windows computers  
•
To turn on accessories on Macintosh computers  
22  
Install the accessories  
   
To turn on accessories on Windows computers  
After you install the device software on Windows computers, Tray 2 must be turned on  
in the print driver in order for it to work with the device. (The duplexer does not need to  
be turned on.)  
1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes.  
- Or -  
Click Start, click Control Panel, and then double-click Printers.  
2. Right-click the printer icon, and then click Properties, Document Defaults, or  
Printing Preferences.  
3. Select one of these tabs: Configure, Device Settings, or Device Options. (The  
name of the tab depends on the print driver and the operating system.) On the  
selected tab, click the accessory that you want to turn on, click Installed from the  
drop-down menu, and then click OK.  
To turn on accessories on Macintosh computers  
The Mac OS automatically turns on all accessories in the print driver when you install  
the device software. If you add a new accessory later, follow these steps:  
1. Click the Printer Setup Utility icon in the Dock.  
2. On the Printer List window, click once on the device you want to set up to select it.  
3. From the Printers menu, select Show info.  
4. Click the Names and Location drop-down menu and select Installable Options.  
5. Check the accessory that you want to turn on.  
6. Click Apply Changes.  
23  
Turn on accessories in the print driver  
   
3 Use the all-in-one  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use control panel menus  
Control-panel message types  
Change device settings  
Use the HP Solution Center (Windows)  
Use the HP photo and imaging software  
Text and symbols  
Load the originals  
Select print media  
Load media  
Configure trays  
Print on special and custom-sized media  
Print borderless  
Set up speed-dial entries (some models only)  
Use control panel menus  
The following sections provide a quick reference to top-level menus that appear on the  
control-panel display. To display a menu, press the menu button for the function you  
want to use.  
NOTE: The type of display on the control panel—color display or two-line display  
—depends on the model you have.  
•
•
Scan menu: Presents a list of destinations; for example, HP photo and imaging  
software. On some models, you can scan and reprint a photo or scan to a memory  
card.  
Fax menu: Allows you to enter a fax or speed-dial number, or display the Fax  
menu. Menu options include:  
•
•
•
•
Modifying resolution  
Lightening/darkening  
Sending delayed faxes  
Setting up new defaults  
•
•
Copy menu: Menu options include:  
•
•
•
Selecting copy quantities  
Reducing/enlarging  
Selecting media type and size  
Photo menu: Menu options include:  
•
•
•
Selecting print options  
Using special features  
Editing  
24  
Use the all-in-one  
     
•
•
Transferring to a computer  
Selecting a proof sheet  
Control-panel message types  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
•
•
Status messages  
Warning messages  
Error messages  
Critical error messages  
Status messages  
Status messages reflect the current state of the device. They inform you of normal  
operation and require no action to clear them. They change as the state of the device  
changes. Whenever the device is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning  
messages, the status message READY appears if the device is turned on.  
Warning messages  
Warning messages inform you of events that require your attention, but they do not  
prevent the device from operating. An example of a warning message is CYAN INK  
LOW. These messages appear until you resolve the condition.  
Error messages  
Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding  
media or clearing a media jam. These messages are usually accompanied by a  
blinking red Attention light. Take the appropriate action to continue printing.  
If the error message shows an error code, press the Power button to turn off the  
device, and then turn it on again. In most situations, this action solves the problem. If  
the message persists, your device might need service. Write down the error code, and  
then go to HP Instant Support to learn more about possible causes for the message.  
For more information, see HP Instant Support.  
Critical error messages  
Critical error messages inform you of a device failure. Some of these messages can  
be cleared by pressing the Power button to turn off the device, and then turning it on  
again. If a critical error persists, service is required. For more information, see Support  
and warranty.  
Change device settings  
You can change the device settings from these places:  
•
•
From the control panel.  
From the HP Solution Center (Windows) or HP Device Manager (Mac OS). For  
more information, see Use the HP photo and imaging software.  
•
From the embedded Web server. For more information, see Embedded Web server.  
25  
Control-panel message types  
                       
Chapter 3  
NOTE: When you are configuring settings in HP Solution Center or in HP Device  
Manager, you cannot see the settings that have been configured from the control  
panel (such as the scan settings).  
To change settings from the control panel  
1. At the control panel, press the menu button for the function you are using (for  
example, Copy Menu).  
2. To reach the option that you want to change, use one of the following methods:  
•
Press a control-panel button, and then use the left or right arrow keys to adjust  
the value.  
•
Select the option from the menu on the control-panel display.  
3. Select the value that you want, and then press OK.  
To change settings from the HP photo and imaging software (Mac OS)  
1. Click the HP Device Manager icon in the Dock.  
2. Select the device in the Devices drop-down menu.  
3. On the Information and Settings menu, click an item that you want to change.  
To change settings from the embedded Web server  
1. Open the embedded Web server.  
2. Select the page with the setting you want to change.  
3. Change the setting and then click Apply.  
Use the HP Solution Center (Windows)  
On a Windows computer, the HP Solution Center is the entry point for the  
HP Photosmart Software. Use the HP Solution Center to change print settings, start  
the Fax Setup Wizard, order supplies, and access the onscreen Help.  
The features available in the HP Solution Center vary depending on the devices you  
have installed. The HP Solution Center is customized to show icons that are  
associated with the selected device. If the selected device is not equipped with a  
particular feature, then the icon for that feature does not appear in the HP Solution  
Center.  
If the HP Solution Center on your computer does not contain any icons, an error might  
have occurred during the software installation. To correct this, use the Control Panel in  
Windows to completely uninstall the HP Photosmart Software, and then reinstall the  
software. For more information, see the onscreen Help that came with the device.  
For information about opening the HP Solution Center, see Use the HP photo and  
imaging software.  
Use the HP photo and imaging software  
You can use the HP photo and imaging software to access many features that are not  
available from the control panel.  
26  
Use the all-in-one  
       
The software is installed on your computer during setup. For further information, see  
the setup documentation that came with your device.  
Access to the HP photo and imaging software differs by operating system (OS). For  
example, if you have a Windows computer, the HP photo and imaging software entry  
point is the HP Photosmart Software window. If you have a Macintosh computer, the  
HP photo and imaging software entry point is the HP Photosmart Studio window.  
Regardless, the entry point serves as the launching pad for the HP photo and imaging  
software and services.  
To open the HP Photosmart Software on a Windows computer  
1. Do one of the following:  
•
•
On the Windows desktop, double-click the HP Photosmart Software icon.  
In the system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar, double-click the HP  
Digital Imaging Monitor icon.  
•
On the taskbar, click Start, point to Programs or All Programs, select HP,  
and then click the HP Photosmart Software.  
2. If you have more than one HP device installed, select the tab with your product's  
name.  
NOTE: On a Windows computer, the features available in the HP Photosmart  
Software vary depending on the devices you have installed. The software is  
customized to show icons that are associated with the selected device. If the  
selected device is not equipped with a particular feature, then the icon for that  
feature does not appear in the software.  
TIP: If the HP Photosmart Software on your computer does not contain any  
icons, an error might have occurred during the software installation. To correct  
this, use the Control Panel in Windows to completely uninstall the  
HP Photosmart Software; then reinstall the software. For more information, see  
the Getting Started Guide that came with your device.  
To open the HP Photosmart Studio software on a Macintosh computer  
1. Click the HP Photosmart Studio icon in the Dock.  
The HP Photosmart Studio window appears.  
2. In the HP Photosmart Studio task bar, click Devices.  
The HP Device Manager window appears.  
3. Select your device from the Device drop-down menu.  
From here, you can scan, send faxes, import documents, and perform  
maintenance procedures such as checking the ink levels for the ink cartridges.  
NOTE: On a Macintosh computer, the features available in the  
HP Photosmart Studio software vary depending on the selected device.  
TIP: When the HP Photosmart Studio software is opened, you can gain  
access to the Dock menu shortcuts by selecting and holding the mouse button  
over the HP Photosmart Studio icon in the Dock.  
27  
Use the HP photo and imaging software  
Chapter 3  
Text and symbols  
You can use the keypad on the control panel to enter text and symbols. You can also  
enter text and symbols from the control panel by using the visual keyboard (some  
models only). The visual keyboard appears automatically on the color display when  
you set up a wired or wireless network, the fax header, or speed-dial entries.  
You can also enter symbols from the keypad when you dial a fax or phone number.  
When the device dials the number, it interprets the symbol and responds accordingly.  
For example, if you enter a dash in the fax number, the device will pause before  
dialing the remainder of the number. A pause is useful if you need to gain access to an  
outside line before dialing the fax number.  
NOTE: If you want to enter a symbol in your fax number, such as a dash, you  
need to enter the symbol by using the keypad.  
Type numbers and text on the control-panel keypad  
You can enter text or symbols by using the keypad on the control panel.  
After you are done entering text, press OK to store your entry.  
To enter text  
1. Press the keypad numbers that correspond to the letters of a name. For example,  
the letters a, b, and c correspond to the number 2, as shown on the button below.  
TIP: Press a button multiple times to see the available characters. Depending  
on your language and country/region setting, other characters might be  
available in addition to the ones shown on the keypad.  
2. After the correct letter appears, wait for the cursor to advance automatically to the  
right, or press the right arrow button. Press the number that corresponds to the  
next letter in the name. Press the button multiple times until the correct letter  
appears. The first letter of a word is automatically set to uppercase.  
To enter a space, pause, or symbol  
•
•
•
To insert a space, press Space.  
To enter a pause, press Redial/Pause. A dash appears in the number sequence.  
To enter a symbol, such as @, press the Symbols button repeatedly to scroll  
through the list of available symbols: asterisk (*), dash (-), ampersand (&), period  
(.), slash (/), parentheses ( ), apostrophe ('), equals (=), number sign (#), at (@),  
underscore (_), plus (+), exclamation (!), semicolon (;), question (?), comma (,),  
colon (:), percent (%), and approximation (~).  
To erase a letter, number, or symbol  
▲ If you make a mistake, press the left arrow button to clear it, and then make the  
correct entry.  
28  
Use the all-in-one  
           
Type text using the visual keyboard (some models only)  
You can enter text or symbols by using the visual keyboard that automatically appears  
on the color display when you must enter text. For example, the visual keyboard  
automatically appears when you are setting up a wired or wireless network, the fax  
header, or speed-dial entries.  
To enter text by using the visual keyboard  
1. To select a letter, number, or symbol using the visual keyboard, press the arrow  
keys to highlight the appropriate selection.  
To enter lowercase letters, uppercase letters, numbers, and symbols  
•
•
•
To enter lowercase letters, select the abc button on the visual keyboard, and  
then press OK.  
To enter uppercase letters, select the ABC button on the visual keyboard, and  
then press OK.  
To enter numbers and symbols, select the 123 button on the visual keyboard,  
and then press OK.  
To add a space  
To add a space, press the right arrow button on the visual keyboard, and then  
press OK.  
NOTE: Make sure you use the right arrow button on the visual keyboard to  
add a space. You cannot add a space by using the arrow buttons on the  
control panel.  
2. When you have highlighted the appropriate letter, number, or symbol, press OK on  
the control panel to select it.  
The selection appears on the color display.  
TIP: To erase a letter, number, or symbol, select Clear on the visual  
keyboard, and then press OK.  
3. When you are finished entering text, numbers, or symbols, select Done on the  
visual keyboard, and then press OK.  
29  
Text and symbols  
 
Chapter 3  
Available symbols for dialing fax numbers (some models only)  
To enter a symbol, such as *, press Symbols repeatedly to scroll through the list of  
symbols. The following table provides the symbols that you can use in a fax or phone  
number sequence, fax header information, and speed-dial entries.  
Available  
symbols  
Description  
Available when entering  
*
Displays an asterisk symbol when  
required for dialing.  
Fax header name, speed-dial  
names, speed-dial numbers, fax or  
phone numbers, and monitor dial  
entries  
-
When auto-dialing, the device enters a  
pause in the number sequence.  
Fax header name, fax header  
number, speed-dial names, speed-  
dial numbers, and fax or phone  
numbers  
( )  
Displays a left or right parenthesis to  
separate numbers, such as area codes,  
for easier reading. These symbols do  
not affect dialing.  
Fax header name, fax header  
number, speed-dial names, speed-  
dial numbers, and fax or phone  
numbers  
W
R
+
When auto-dialing, W causes the device  
to wait for a dial tone before continuing  
to dial.  
Speed-dial numbers and fax or  
phone numbers  
During auto-dialing, the R functions the  
same as a Flash button on your  
telephone.  
Speed-dial numbers and fax or  
phone numbers  
Displays a plus symbol. This symbol  
does not affect dialing.  
Fax header name, fax header  
number, speed-dial names, speed-  
dial numbers, and fax or phone  
numbers  
Load the originals  
You can load an original for a copy, fax, or scan job in the automatic document feeder  
or on the scanner glass. Originals that are loaded in the automatic document feeder  
are automatically fed into the device.  
Load an original in the automatic document feeder (ADF)  
You can copy, scan, or fax a one-sided or two-sided, single- or multiple-page, A4- or  
letter-size document by placing it in the document feeder tray.  
CAUTION: Do not load photos in the ADF; this might cause damage to your  
photos.  
NOTE: Two-sided legal-size documents cannot be scanned, copied, or faxed  
using the ADF. Some features, such as the Fit to Page copy feature, do not work  
when you load your originals in the ADF. You must load your originals on the glass.  
The document feeder tray holds a maximum of 50 sheets of plain paper.  
30  
Use the all-in-one  
           
To load an original in the document feeder tray  
1. Load your original, with the print side up, into the document feeder tray. Place the  
pages so that the top edge of the document goes in first. Slide the media into the  
automatic document feeder until you hear a beep or see a message on the display  
indicating that the loaded pages were detected.  
TIP: For more help on loading originals in the automatic document feeder,  
refer to the diagram engraved in the document feeder tray.  
2. Slide the width guides inward until they stop at the left and right edges of the media.  
NOTE: Remove all originals from the document feeder tray before lifting the lid on  
the device.  
Load an original on the scanner glass  
You can copy, scan, or fax up to letter- or A4-size originals by loading them on the  
glass. Some models support legal-size originals on the glass. If your original contains  
multiple full-size pages, load it in the automatic document feeder. If your model does  
not support legal-size originals on the glass, load legal-size originals in the automatic  
document feeder.  
NOTE: Many of the special features will not work correctly if the glass and lid  
backing are not clean. For more information, see Clean the device.  
To load an original on the scanner glass  
1. Remove all originals from the document feeder tray, and then lift the lid.  
2. Load your original print side down in the right front corner of the glass.  
TIP: For more help on loading an original, refer to the engraved guides along  
the edge of the glass.  
31  
Load the originals  
   
Chapter 3  
3. Close the lid.  
Select print media  
The device is designed to work well with most types of office media. It is best to test a  
variety of print media types before buying large quantities. Use HP media for optimum  
print quality. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com for more information about HP  
media.  
Tips for selecting and using print media  
For the best results, observe the following guidelines.  
•
Always use media that conforms to the device specifications. For more  
information, see Understand specifications for supported media.  
•
•
Load only one type of media at a time into a tray.  
For Tray 1 and Tray 2, load media print-side down and aligned against the right  
and back edges of the tray. Tray 2 is available with some models. For more  
information, see Load media.  
•
•
Tray 2 is designed to hold only plain paper.  
Do not overload the trays. For more information, see Understand specifications for  
supported media.  
•
To prevent jams, poor print quality, and other printing problems, avoid the following  
media:  
•
•
•
•
•
Multipart forms  
Media that is damaged, curled, or wrinkled  
Media with cutouts or perforations  
Media that is heavily textured, embossed, or does not accept ink well  
Media that is too lightweight or stretches easily  
Cards and envelopes  
•
Avoid envelopes that have a very slick finish, self-stick adhesives, clasps, or  
windows. Also avoid cards and envelopes with thick, irregular, or curled edges, or  
areas that are wrinkled, torn, or otherwise damaged.  
•
•
Use tightly constructed envelopes, and make sure the folds are sharply creased.  
Load envelopes with the flaps facing up.  
32  
Use the all-in-one  
         
Photo media  
•
Use the Best mode to print photographs. Note that in this mode, printing takes  
longer and more memory is required from your computer.  
•
Remove each sheet as it prints and set it aside to dry. Allowing wet media to stack  
up may cause smearing.  
Transparencies  
•
Insert transparencies with the rough side down and the adhesive strip pointing  
towards the back of the device.  
•
Use the Normal mode to print transparencies. This mode provides longer drying  
time and ensures that the ink dries completely before the next page is delivered to  
the output tray.  
•
Remove each sheet as it prints and set it aside to dry. Allowing wet media to stack  
up may cause smearing.  
Custom-sized media  
•
•
Use only custom-sized media that is supported by the device.  
If your application supports custom-sized media, set the media size in the  
application before printing the document. If not, set the size in the print driver. You  
might need to reformat existing documents to print them correctly on custom-sized  
media.  
Understand specifications for supported media  
Use the Understand supported sizes and Understand supported media types and  
weights tables to determine the correct media to use with your device, and determine  
what features will work with your media.  
•
•
Understand supported sizes  
Understand supported media types and weights  
Understand supported sizes  
NOTE: Tray 2 and the duplexer are available with some models.  
Media size  
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
Duplexer  
ADF  
Standard media sizes  
U.S. Letter (216 x 279 mm; 8.5 x  
11 inches)  
8.5 x 13 inches (216 x 330 mm)*  
U.S. Legal (216 x 356 mm; 8.5 x  
14 inches)  
A4 (210 x 297 mm; 8.3 x 11.7  
inches)  
U.S. Executive (184 x 267 mm;  
7.25 x 10.5 inches)  
33  
Select print media  
               
Chapter 3  
(continued)  
Media size  
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
ADF  
Duplexer  
U.S. Statement (140 x 216 mm;  
5.5 x 8.5 inches)  
B5 (182 x 257 mm; 7.17 x 10.12  
inches)  
A5 (148 x 210 mm; 5.8 x 8.3  
inches)  
6 x 8 inches*  
Borderless A4 (210 x 297 mm;  
8.3 x 11.7 inches)*  
Borderless A5 (148 x 210 mm;  
5.8 x 8.3 inches)*  
Borderless B5 (182 x 257 mm;  
7.17 x 10.12 inches)*  
Envelopes  
U.S. #10 Envelope (105 x 241  
mm; 4.12 x 9.5 inches)*  
Monarch Envelope (98 x 191 mm;  
3.88 x 7.5 inches)*  
HP Greeting Card Envelope (111  
x 152 mm; 4.38 x 6 inches)*  
A2 Envelope (111 x 146 mm;  
4.37 x 5.75 inches)*  
DL Envelope (110 x 220 mm; 4.3  
x 8.7 inches)*  
C5 Envelope (162 x 229 mm; 6.4  
x 9 inches)*  
C6 Envelope (114 x 162 mm; 4.5  
x 6.4 inches)*  
Japanese Envelope Chou #3  
(120 x 235 mm; 4.7 x 9.3 inches)*  
Japanese Envelope Chou #4 (90  
x 205 mm; 3.5 x 8.1 inches)*  
Cards  
Index card (76.2 x 127 mm; 3 x 5  
inches)*  
Index card (102 x 152 mm; 4 x 6  
inches)*  
Index card (127 x 203 mm; 5 x 8  
inches)*  
A6 card (105 x 148.5 mm; 4.13 x  
5.83 inches)*  
34  
Use the all-in-one  
   
(continued)  
Media size  
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
ADF  
Duplexer  
Borderless A6 card (105 x 148.5  
mm; 4.13 x 5.83 inches)*  
Hagaki** (100 x 148 mm; 3.9 x  
5.8 inches)*  
Photo media  
Photo media (76.2 x 127 mm; 3 x  
5 inches)*  
Photo media (102 x 152 mm; 4 x  
6 inches)*  
Photo media (5 x 7 inches)*  
Photo media (8 x 10 inches)*  
Photo media (10 x 15 cm)*  
Photo L (89 x 127 mm; 3.5 x 5  
inches)*  
Borderless photo media (102 x  
152 mm; 4 x 6 inches)*  
Borderless photo media (5 x 7  
inches)*  
Borderless photo media (8 x 10  
inches)*  
Borderless photo media (8.5 x 11  
inches)*  
Borderless photo media (10 x 15  
cm)*  
Borderless Photo L (89 x 127  
mm; 3.5 x 5 inches)*  
Other media  
Custom-sized media between  
76.2 to 216 mm wide and 127 to  
356 mm long (3 to 8.5 inches  
wide and 5 to 14 inches long) *  
Custom-sized media (ADF)  
between 127 to 216 mm wide and  
241 to 305 mm long (5 to 8.5  
inches wide and 9.5 to 12 inches  
long)  
Panorama (4 x 10 inches, 4 x 11  
inches, and 4 x 12 inches) *  
Borderless panorama (4 x 10  
inches, 4 x 11 inches, and 4 x 12  
inches) *  
35  
Select print media  
   
Chapter 3  
* Not compatible for use with the ADF for single- or double- sided printing  
** The device is compatible with plain and inkjet hagaki from Japan Post only. It is not  
compatible with photo hagaki from Japan Post.  
Understand supported media types and weights  
NOTE: Tray 2 and the duplexer are available with some models.  
Tray  
Type  
Weight  
Capacity  
60 to 105 g/m2  
Tray 1  
Paper  
Up to 250 sheets of  
plain paper  
(16 to 28 lb bond)  
(25 mm or 1 inch  
stacked)  
Transparencies  
Photo media  
Labels  
Up to 70 sheets  
(17 mm or 0.67 inch  
stacked)  
280 g/m2  
Up to 100 sheets  
(17 mm or 0.67 inch  
stacked)  
(75 lb bond)  
Up to 100 sheets  
(17 mm or 0.67 inch  
stacked)  
75 to 90 g/m2  
Envelopes  
Up to 30 sheets  
(17 mm or 0.67 inch  
stacked)  
(20 to 24 lb bond  
envelope)  
Up to 200 g/m2  
(110 lb index)  
Cards  
Up to 80 cards  
60 to 105 g/m2  
Tray 2  
Plain paper only  
Up to 350 sheets of  
plain paper  
(16 to 28 lb bond)  
(35 mm or 1.38 inch  
stacked)  
60 to 105 g/m2  
Duplexer  
Paper  
Not applicable  
(16 to 28 lb bond)  
Output-bin  
All supported media  
Up to 150 sheets of  
plain paper (text  
printing)  
36  
Use the all-in-one  
     
Set minimum margins  
The document margins must match (or exceed) these margin settings in portrait  
orientation.  
Media  
(1) Left  
margin  
(2) Right  
margin  
(3) Top  
margin  
(4) Bottom  
margin*  
U.S. Letter  
U.S. Legal  
A4  
3.3 mm (0.13 3.3 mm (0.13 3.3 mm (0.13 3.3 mm (0.13  
inch)  
inch)  
inch)  
inch)  
U.S. Executive  
U.S. Statement  
8.5 x 13 inch  
B5  
A5  
Cards  
Custom-sized media  
Photo media  
Envelopes  
3.3 mm (0.13 3.3 mm (0.13 16.5 mm  
inch) inch) (0.65 inch)  
16.5 mm  
(0.65 inch)  
* To achieve this margin setting on a computer running Windows, click the Advanced  
tab in the print driver, and select Minimize Margins.  
NOTE: If you are using the duplexer (available with some models), the minimum  
top and bottom margins must match or exceed 12 mm (0.47 inch).  
Load media  
This section provides instructions for loading media into the device.  
NOTE: Tray 2 is available with some models. For ordering information, see Order  
printing supplies online.  
37  
Load media  
         
Chapter 3  
To load Tray 1 (main tray)  
1. Lift the output tray.  
2. Insert the media print-side down along the right of the tray. Make sure the stack of  
media aligns with the right and back edges of the tray, and does not exceed the  
line marking in the tray.  
NOTE: Do not load paper while the device is printing.  
3. Slide the media guides in the tray to adjust them for the media size that you have  
loaded, and then lower the output tray.  
4. Pull out the extension on the output tray.  
38  
Use the all-in-one  
 
To load Tray 2  
1. Pull the tray out of the device by grasping under the front of the tray.  
2. Insert the paper print-side down along the right of the tray. Make sure the stack of  
paper aligns with the right and back edges of the tray, and does not exceed the  
line marking in the tray.  
NOTE: Tray 2 can be loaded only with plain paper.  
3. Slide the media guides in the tray to adjust them for the size that you have loaded.  
39  
Load media  
 
Chapter 3  
4. Gently reinsert the tray.  
5. Pull out the extension on the output tray.  
Configure trays  
NOTE: Tray 2 is available with some models. For ordering information, see Order  
printing supplies online.  
By default, the device draws media from Tray 1. If Tray 1 is empty, the device draws  
media from Tray 2 (if it is installed and loaded with media). You can change this  
default behavior by using the following features:  
•
Tray Lock: Use this feature to protect special media such as letterhead or  
preprinted media from accidental use. If the device runs out of media while printing  
a document, it will not use media from a locked tray to complete the print job.  
•
Default Tray: Use this feature to determine the first tray from which the device  
draws media.  
NOTE: To use the tray lock and default tray settings, you must select the  
automatic tray selection option in the device software. If the device is on a network  
and you set a default tray, the setting will affect all users of the device.  
Tray 2 is designed to hold only plain paper.  
The following table lists possible ways you can use the tray settings to meet your  
printing needs.  
I want to...  
Follow these steps  
Load both trays with the same media, and  
have the device pick media from one tray if  
the other one is empty.  
Load media in Tray 1 and Tray 2. For  
more information, see Load media.  
•
Make sure tray lock is disabled.  
•
•
Have both special media (such as  
transparencies or letterhead) and plain paper  
loaded in the trays.  
Load special media in Tray 1 and plain  
paper in Tray 2.  
Make sure tray lock is set to Tray 1.  
•
Load media in both trays but have the device  
pick media from a specific tray first.  
Load media in Tray 1 and Tray 2.  
•
•
Make sure default tray is set to the  
appropriate tray.  
40  
Use the all-in-one  
     
To configure the trays  
1. Make sure the device is turned on.  
2. Perform one of the following:  
•
Embedded Web server: Click the Settings tab and click Paper Handling in  
the left panel.  
•
Print driver (Windows): Click the Printer services button on either the  
Features or Color tab, and then select Paper Handling.  
•
•
Toolbox (Windows): Click the Services tab and click Paper Handling.  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS): Click Paper Handling from the Printer Settings  
panel.  
•
Control panel: Press the Setup button, select Preferences, and then select  
Default Tray or Tray Lock.  
3. Click OK or Apply after changing the desired tray settings.  
Print on special and custom-sized media  
•
To print on special or custom-sized media (Windows)  
•
To print on special or custom-sized media (Mac OS)  
To print on special or custom-sized media (Windows)  
1. Load the appropriate media. For more information, see Load media.  
2. With a document open, click Print on the File menu, and then click Setup,  
Properties, or Preferences.  
3. Click the Paper/Features tab.  
4. Select the media size from the Size is drop-down list.  
To set a custom media size:  
a. Click the Custom button.  
b. Type a name for the new custom size.  
c. In the Width and Height boxes, type the dimensions, and then click Save.  
d. Click OK twice to close the properties or preferences dialog box. Open the  
dialog box again.  
e. Select the new custom size.  
5. To select the media type:  
a. Click More in the Type is drop-down list.  
b. Click the desired media type, and then click OK.  
6. Select the media source from the Source is drop-down list.  
7. Change any other settings, and then click OK.  
8. Print your document.  
To print on special or custom-sized media (Mac OS)  
1. Load the appropriate media. For more information, see Load media.  
2. On the File menu, click Page Setup.  
3. Select the media size.  
41  
Print on special and custom-sized media  
           
Chapter 3  
4. To set a custom media size:  
a. Click Manage Custom Sizes in the Paper Size pull-down menu.  
b. Click New and type a name for the size in the Paper Size Name box.  
c. In the Width and Height boxes, type the dimensions and set the margins, if  
desired.  
d. Click Done or OK, and then click Save.  
5. On the File menu, click Page Setup, and then select the new custom size.  
6. Click OK.  
7. On the File menu, click Print.  
8. Open the Paper Handling panel.  
9. Under Destination Paper Size, click the Scale to fit paper size tab, and then  
select the customized paper size.  
10. Change any other desired settings, and then click OK or Print.  
Print borderless  
Borderless printing lets you print to the edges of certain media types and a range of  
standard media sizes.  
NOTE: Open the file in a software application and assign the image size. Make  
sure the size corresponds to the media size on which you are printing the image.  
You can also gain access to this feature from the Printing Shortcuts tab. Open  
the printer driver, select the Printing Shortcuts tab, and select the printing  
shortcut for this print job drop-down list.  
To print a borderless document (Windows)  
1. Load the appropriate media. For more information, see Load media.  
2. Open the file that you want to print.  
3. From the application, open the print driver:  
a. Click File, and then click Print.  
b. Click Properties or Setup.  
4. Click the Paper/Quality tab.  
5. Select the media size from the Size is drop-down list.  
6. Select the Borderless Printing check box.  
7. Select the media source from the Source is drop-down list.  
8. Select the media type from the Type is drop-down list.  
9. If you are printing photos, select Best from the Print Quality drop-down list.  
Alternatively, select Maximum dpi, which provides up to 4800 x 1200 optimized  
dpi* for optimum print quality.  
*Up to 4800 x 1200 optimized dpi for color printing and 1200 input dpi. This setting  
might temporarily use a large amount of hard disk space (400 MB or more) and will  
print more slowly.  
10. Change any other print settings, and then click OK.  
42  
Use the all-in-one  
     
11. Print the document.  
12. If you printed on photo media with a tear-off tab, remove the tab to make the  
document completely borderless.  
To print a borderless document (Mac OS)  
1. Load the appropriate media. For more information, see Load media.  
2. Open the file that you want to print.  
3. Click File, and then click Page Setup.  
4. Select the borderless media size, and then click OK.  
5. Click File, and then click Print.  
6. Open the Paper Type/Quality panel.  
7. Click the Paper tab, and then select the media type from the Paper type drop-  
down list.  
8. If you are printing photos, select Best from the Quality drop-down list.  
Alternatively, select Maximum dpi, which provides up to 4800 x 1200 optimized  
dpi*.  
*Up to 4800 x 1200 optimized dpi for color printing and 1200 input dpi. This setting  
might temporarily use a large amount of hard disk space (400 MB or more) and will  
print more slowly.  
9. Select the media source. If you are printing on thick or photo media, select the  
manual feed option.  
10. Change any other print settings, and then click Print.  
11. If you printed on photo media with a tear-off tab, remove the tab to make the  
document completely borderless.  
Set up speed-dial entries (some models only)  
You can set up frequently used fax numbers and network folders as speed-dial  
entries. This lets you dial those numbers quickly by using the control panel. The first  
five entries for each of these destinations are associated with the five speed-dial  
buttons on the control panel.  
Set up fax numbers as speed-dial entries or groups  
You can store fax numbers or groups of fax numbers as speed-dial entries. Speed-dial  
entries 1 through 5 are associated with the corresponding five speed-dial buttons on  
the control panel.  
For information about printing a list of the speed-dial entries that are set up, see Print  
and view a list of speed-dial entries.  
Set up speed-dial entries (some models only)  
43  
         
Chapter 3  
To set up speed-dial entries  
•
Embedded Web server (network connection): Open the embedded Web server,  
click the Settings tab, and then click Fax Speed-dial in the left pane.  
•
•
•
To add an entry: Type the required information in the fields in the Quick Add  
Fax Speed-Dial Entry section.  
To edit or remove an entry, in the Fax Speed-dial Address Book section,  
select the entry and click either the Edit or Delete icon.  
Click Apply when you are finished.  
•
•
•
HP Photosmart Software: Open the HP Photosmart Software and follow the  
instructions in the onscreen Help.  
HP Device Manager (Mac OS): Launch HP Device Manager, click Information  
and Settings, and then select Fax Speed Dial Settings from the drop-down list.  
Control panel: Press Setup, and then select the Speed Dial Setup option.  
•
To add or change an entry: Select Individual Speed Dial or Group Speed  
Dial and press the arrow keys to move to an unused entry number, or type a  
number on the keypad. Type the fax number, and then press OK. Include any  
pauses or other required numbers, such as an area code, an access code for  
numbers outside a PBX system (usually a 9 or 0), or a long-distance prefix.  
Type the name, and then press OK.  
•
To delete one entry or all entries: Select Delete Speed Dial, press the arrow  
keys to highlight the speed-dial entry that you want to delete, and then press OK.  
To set up a speed-dial group  
If you send information to the same group of fax numbers on a regular basis, you can  
set up a speed-dial entry for a group in order to simplify the task. The speed-dial entry  
for a group can be associated with a speed-dial button on the control panel.  
A group member must be a member of the speed-dial list before you can add the  
member to a speed-dial group. You can add up to 20 fax numbers to each group (with  
up to 50 characters for each fax number).  
•
Embedded Web server (network connection): Open the embedded Web server,  
click the Settings tab, and then click Fax Speed-dial in the left pane. Click the link  
that contains the number for the entry (for example, 26-50) in the Fax Speed-dial  
Address Book.  
•
To add a group, in the Fax Speed-dial Address Book, click the New Group  
button, and then select the individual entries from the selection. Enter the  
appropriate group information and click Apply.  
•
To edit or remove an entry, in the Fax Speed-dial Address Book, select the  
entry and click either the Edit or Delete icon.  
•
•
To delete a group: Select the entries and click theDelete button.  
Click Apply when you are finished.  
•
HP Photosmart Software: Open the HP Photosmart Software and follow the  
instructions in the onscreen Help.  
44  
Use the all-in-one  
     
•
•
HP Device Manager (Mac OS): Launch HP Device Manager, click Information  
and Settings, and then select Fax Speed Dial Settings from the drop-down list.  
Control panel: Press the Setup button, and then select the Speed Dial Setup  
option.  
•
•
•
•
To add a group: Select Group Speed Dial, select an unassigned speed-dial  
entry, and then press OK. Use the arrow keys to highlight a speed-dial entry,  
and then press OK to select it (a check mark appears next to the speed-dial  
entry). Repeat this step to add additional speed-dial entries to this group.  
When finished, select the Done Selecting option, and then press OK. Use the  
onscreen keyboard to enter a group speed-dial name, and then select Done.  
To add entries to a group: Select Group Speed Dial, select the group speed-  
dial entry that you want to change, and then press OK. Use the arrow keys to  
highlight a speed-dial entry, and then press OK to select it (a check mark  
appears next to the speed-dial entry). Repeat this step to add additional speed-  
dial entries to this group. When finished, select the Done Selecting option,  
and then press OK. Select Done at the Group Name screen.  
To delete an entry from a group: Select Group Speed Dial, select the group  
speed-dial entry that you want to change, and then press OK. Use the arrow  
keys to highlight a speed-dial entry, and then press OK to select it (the check  
mark is removed from the speed-dial entry). Repeat this step to remove  
additional speed-dial entries from this group. When finished, select the Done  
Selecting option, and then press OK. Select Done at the Group Name screen.  
To delete a group: Select Delete Speed Dial, press the arrow keys to highlight  
the speed-dial entry that you want to delete, and then press OK.  
Set up network folders as speed-dial entries (some models)  
You can store up to ten network folders as speed-dial entries. Five entries are  
associated with the corresponding five speed-dial buttons on the control panel. You  
cannot set up group speed-dial entries. The Direct Digital Filing Speed-dial allows you  
to create folders to scan and store digital documents for speed-dial sending. Use the  
Friendly Name, Network Path, User Name, Password and Optional PIN fields to add a  
new Direct Digital Filing speed-dial entry.  
For information about printing a list of the speed-dial entries that are set up, see Print  
and view a list of speed-dial entries.  
To set up speed-dial entries  
Embedded Web server (network connection): Open the embedded Web server,  
click the Settings tab, and then click Direct Digital Filing Speed-dial in the left pane.  
•
To add or change an entry: Select an entry in the Direct Digital Filing Speed-dial  
Address Book, click the Edit button, make necessary changes, and then click  
Apply.  
•
•
To delete an entry: Select the entry and then click the Delete button.  
Click Apply when you are finished.  
Set up speed-dial entries (some models only)  
45  
     
Chapter 3  
Print and view a list of speed-dial entries  
You can print or view a list of all of the speed-dial entries that have been set up. Each  
entry in the list contains the following information:  
•
Speed-dial number (the first five entries correspond to the five speed-dial buttons  
on the control panel)  
•
•
•
Name associated with the fax number or group of fax numbers  
For the fax speed-dial list, the fax number (or all of the fax numbers for a group)  
For the network folder list, the folder path name  
To print a list of speed-dial entries  
Embedded Web server: Select the Settings tab, select Fax Speed-dial from the left  
pane, and then print the Fax Speed-dial Address Book page from your browser.  
To view a list of speed-dial entries  
•
•
•
Embedded Web server (network connection): Open the embedded Web server,  
click the Settings tab, and then click Fax Speed-dial in the left pane.  
HP Device Manager (Mac OS): Launch HP Device Manager, click Information  
and Settings, and then select Fax Speed Dial Settings from the drop-down list.  
HP Photosmart Software: Open the HP Photosmart Software and follow the  
instructions in the onscreen Help.  
46  
Use the all-in-one  
       
4 Print  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
•
Change print settings  
Print on both sides (duplexing)  
Cancel a print job  
Change print settings  
You can change print settings (such as paper size or type) from an application or the  
printer driver. Changes made from an application take precedence over changes  
made from the printer driver. However, after the application is closed, the settings  
return to the defaults configured in the driver.  
NOTE: To set print settings for all print jobs, make the changes in the printer  
driver.  
For more information about the features of the Windows printer driver, see the  
online help for the driver. For more information about printing from a specific  
application, see the documentation that came with the application.  
To change settings from an application for current jobs (Windows)  
1. Open the document that you want to print.  
2. On the File menu, click Print, and then click Setup, Properties, or Preferences.  
(Specific options may vary depending on the application that you are using.)  
3. Change the settings that you want, and then click OK, Print, or a similar command.  
To change default settings for all future jobs (Windows)  
1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes.  
- Or -  
Click Start, click Control Panel, and then double-click Printers.  
2. Right-click the printer icon, and then click Properties, Document Defaults, or  
Printing Preferences.  
3. Change the settings that you want, and then click OK.  
To change settings (Mac OS)  
1. On the File menu, click Page Setup.  
2. Change the settings that you want (such as paper size), and then click OK.  
3. On the File menu, click Print to open the print driver.  
4. Change the settings that you want (such as media type), and then click OK or Print.  
Print  
47  
                 
Chapter 4  
Print on both sides (duplexing)  
You can print on both sides of a sheet of media, either automatically by using the  
optional automatic two-sided printing accessory (duplexer), or manually by turning the  
media over and feeding it into the device again.  
•
•
•
Guidelines for printing on both sides of a page  
To perform duplexing (Windows)  
To perform automatic duplexing (Mac OS)  
Guidelines for printing on both sides of a page  
•
Always use media that conforms to the device specifications. For more  
information, see Understand specifications for supported media.  
•
•
Specify duplex options in your application or in the printer driver.  
Do not print on both sides of transparencies, envelopes, photo paper, glossy  
media, or paper lighter than 16 lb bond (60 g/m2) or heavier than 28 lb bond (105 g/  
m2). Jams might occur with these media types.  
•
Several kinds of media require a specific orientation when you print on both sides  
of a page, such as letterhead, preprinted paper, and paper with watermarks and  
prepunched holes. When you print from a computer running Windows, the device  
prints the first side of the media first. When you print from a computer using the  
Mac OS, the device prints the second side first. Load the media with the front side  
facing down.  
•
•
For auto-duplexing, when printing finishes on one side of the media, the device  
holds the media and pauses while the ink dries. Once the ink dries, the media is  
pulled back into the device and the second side is printed. When printing is  
complete, the media is dropped onto the output tray. Do not grab it before printing  
is complete.  
You can print on both sides of supported custom-sized media by turning the media  
over and feeding it into the device again. For more information, see Understand  
specifications for supported media.  
To perform duplexing (Windows)  
1. Load the appropriate media. For more information, see Guidelines for printing on  
both sides of a page and Load media.  
2. Make sure the duplexer is properly installed. For more information, see Install the  
duplexer.  
3. With a document open, click Print on the File menu, and then click Setup,  
Properties, or Preferences.  
4. Click the Features tab.  
5. Select the Two-sided printing drop-down list. For auto-duplexing, ensure that  
Automatic is selected.  
6. To automatically resize each page to match the document's onscreen layout,  
ensure Preserve Layout is selected. Clearing this option might result in unwanted  
page breaks.  
7. Select or clear the Flip Pages Up check box depending on which way you want  
the binding. See the graphics in the print driver for examples.  
48  
Print  
         
8. Choose a booklet layout from the Booklet Layout drop-down list, if you want.  
9. Change any other settings, and then click OK.  
10. Print your document.  
To perform automatic duplexing (Mac OS)  
1. Load the appropriate media. For more information, see Guidelines for printing on  
both sides of a page and Load media.  
2. Make sure the duplexer is properly installed. For more information, see Install the  
duplexer.  
3. On the File menu, click Print.  
4. Open the Two-Sided Printing panel.  
5. Select the option to print on both sides.  
6. Select the binding orientation by clicking the appropriate icon.  
7. Change any other settings, and then click Print.  
Cancel a print job  
You can cancel a print job using one of the following methods.  
Control panel: Press (Cancel button). This clears the job that the device is  
currently processing. It does not affect jobs waiting to be processed.  
Windows: Double-click the printer icon that appears in the lower-right corner of the  
computer screen. Select the print job, and then press the Delete key on the keyboard.  
Mac OS: Double-click the printer in the Printer Setup Utility. Select the print job, click  
Hold, and then click Delete.  
49  
Cancel a print job  
       
5 Copy  
You can produce high-quality color and grayscale copies on a variety of paper types  
and sizes.  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
•
•
Make copies from the control panel  
Change the copy settings  
Crop an original (color display models only)  
Cancel a copy job  
Make copies from the control panel  
You can make quality copies from the control panel.  
To make a copy from the control panel  
1. Make sure you have paper loaded in the input tray.  
2. Load your original using the scanner glass or the ADF. For more information, see  
Load the originals  
3. Do one of the following:  
•
•
Press START COPY Black to start a black-and-white copy job.  
Press START COPY Color to start a color copy job.  
NOTE: If you have a color original, pressing START COPY Black produces a  
black-and-white copy of the color original, while pressing START COPY Color  
produces a full-color copy of the color original.  
Change the copy settings  
You can customize the copy settings to handle nearly any task.  
When you change copy settings, the changes are for the current copy job only. You  
must set the changes as defaults for the settings to apply to all future copy jobs.  
To save the current settings as defaults for future jobs  
1. Make any necessary changes to the settings in the Copy Menu.  
2. Press Copy Menu, and then press the arrow keys until Set New Defaults appears.  
3. Press the arrow keys to select Yes, and then press OK.  
Crop an original (color display models only)  
Before copying an original, you might want to select an area to copy using the Crop  
setting from the Copy Menu. Selecting the Crop setting starts a scan and shows a  
preview of the original on the color display.  
Cropping changes the dimensions of the image, thus decreasing its physical size.  
50  
Copy  
               
TIP: You can resize the cropped image by changing the Reduce/Enlarge setting.  
Use Fit to Page to make a copy with borders. Enlarging a cropped image might  
affect print quality depending on the resolution of the image.  
To crop an image from the control panel  
1. In the Copy area, press Copy Menu and then select Crop.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to set the position of the upper-left corner of the crop area.  
3. Press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to set the position of the lower-right corner of the crop area.  
5. Press OK.  
The cropped image is displayed on the color graphics display.  
Cancel a copy job  
▲ To stop copying, press Cancel on the control panel.  
51  
Cancel a copy job  
     
6 Scan  
You can scan originals and send them to a variety of destinations, such as a folder on  
the network or a program on a computer. You can use the control panel, the HP photo  
and imaging software, and TWAIN-compliant or WIA-compliant programs on a  
computer.  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Scan an original  
Use Webscan via embedded Web server  
Scan from a TWAIN-compliant or a WIA-compliant program  
Edit a scanned original  
Change scan settings  
Cancel a scan job  
Scan an original  
You can start a scan from a computer or from the control panel. This section explains  
how to scan from the control panel only.  
NOTE: You can also use the HP Photosmart Software to scan an image,  
including panorama images. Using this software, you can edit a scanned image  
and create special projects using a scanned image. For information about how to  
scan from the computer, and how to adjust, resize, rotate, crop, and sharpen your  
scans, see the onscreen HP Photosmart Software Help that came with your  
software.  
To use the scan features, your device and computer must be connected and turned  
on. The printer software must also be installed and running on your computer prior to  
scanning. To verify that the printer software is running on a computer running  
Windows, look for the device icon in the system tray at the lower-right side of the  
screen, near the clock. To verify this on a computer using the Mac OS, open the HP  
Device Manager, and click Scan Picture. If a scanner is available, it will launch the HP  
ScanPro application. If it is not available, a message appears to let you know that a  
scanner was not found.  
NOTE: Closing the HP Digital Imaging Monitor icon in your Windows system tray  
can cause your device to lose some of its scan functionality and result in the No  
Connection error message. If this happens, you can restore full functionality by  
restarting your computer or by starting the HP Photosmart Software.  
Set up Direct Digital Filing (some models only)  
Direct Digital Filing is a feature that allows you to scan and save a document to a  
folder and share documents with other people on your network. You can set up Direct  
Digital Filing speed-dial by using the embedded Web server on your computer.  
52  
Scan  
         
NOTE: The implementation of Direct Digital Filing requires a basic understanding  
of networking concepts. Setup of these features should be completed by users with  
some networking experience.  
To set up a network folder  
▲ Create a folder on your network. This folder is used to store files that are scanned  
by using the Direct Digital Filing feature.  
NOTE: Make sure that all of the people using the network folder have  
permission to access the folder, including the ability to write and change the  
contents of the folder. To change the permissions for folders, see the  
documentation available for your operating system.  
To set up a speed-dial entry  
1. Open a Web browser and type in the IP Address that is assigned to the device. For  
example, if the IP address is 123.123.123.123, type the following address into the  
Web browser: http://123.123.123.123  
NOTE: The printer must be connected to the network. The IP address of the  
device can be obtained from the control panel.  
2. Click the Settings tab.  
3. Under Address Book, click Direct Digital Filing Speed-dial.  
4. Enter the information for the speed-dial entry, and then modify any scan settings  
that you want to change.  
NOTE: You can also add a personal identification number (PIN) to help  
prevent unauthorized people from using this speed-dial. After the PIN is set,  
the device control panel prompts for the PIN whenever the speed-dial is used.  
To disable the PIN, leave the PIN field blank.  
5. Click Add. The entry is added to the Direct Digital Filing Speed-dial Address Book.  
Scan an original to a network folder  
You can scan originals directly into a network folder without any computer-based  
software. The shared folder can reside on a file server or on any computer on your  
network.  
Before using this feature, you must set up a folder location in the Direct Digital Filing  
Speed-dial address book by using the embedded Web server (EWS) as described in  
53  
Scan an original  
     
Chapter 6  
the previous section. For more information, also see Set up network folders as speed-  
dial entries (some models) or the Getting Started Guide that came with the device.  
To send a scan to a network folder  
1. Load the original on the scanner glass or in the automatic document feeder (ADF).  
For more information, see Load the originals.  
2. Press Digital Filing, and then do one of the following:  
•
•
Select a destination from the speed-dial entries on the display.  
Select a destination by pressing one of the five speed-dial buttons on the  
display.  
NOTE: If a PIN has been set up for the speed-dial entry, you must enter your  
PIN before continuing.  
3. Press START SCAN.  
NOTE: The connection might take some time, depending on network traffic and  
connection speed.  
Scan an original to a program on a computer (direct connection)  
Use the following steps if your device is directly connected to a computer via a USB  
cable.  
When the scan is complete, the program that you have selected opens and displays  
the document that you have scanned.  
To send a scan to a program on a computer from the HP photo and imaging  
software  
1. At the computer, open the HP photo and imaging software. For more information,  
see Use the HP photo and imaging software.  
2. See the onscreen Help for further instructions.  
To send a scan to a program on a computer from the control panel (direct  
connect)  
1. Load the original on the scanner glass or in the ADF. For more information, see  
Load the originals.  
2. Press the Scan Menu or Scan To button.  
3. Press the arrow keys to select the program that you want to use (such as the HP  
photo and imaging software), and then press OK.  
4. Press START SCAN.  
To send a scan to a program on a computer from the control panel (network  
connection)  
1. Load the original on the scanner glass or in the ADF. For more information, see  
Load the originals.  
2. Press the Scan Menu or Scan To button.  
3. Select Select Computer.  
54  
Scan  
           
4. Select a computer name from the list of available computers, and then press OK.  
5. Press the arrow keys to select the program that you want to use (such as the HP  
photo and imaging software).  
6. Press OK or START SCAN.  
Scan an original to a memory device  
You can send the scanned image as a JPEG image or a PDF file to the memory card  
that is currently inserted, or to a storage device that is currently attached to the front  
USB port. You also have other scanning options including quality and paper size  
settings.  
To scan to a memory device  
1. Load your original print-side down in the right-front corner of the glass or in the ADF.  
2. Insert the memory device.  
3. Press START SCAN.  
•
The Scan Menu appears, listing various options or destinations. The default  
destination is whichever one you selected the last time you used this menu.  
•
If your device is directly connected to your computer, the Scan To menu  
appears.  
4. Press the arrow keys to highlight Memory Device, and then press OK.  
The device scans the image and saves the file to the memory card or storage  
device.  
Use Webscan via embedded Web server  
Webscan is a feature of the embedded Web server that lets you scan photos and  
documents from your device to your computer using a Web browser. This feature is  
available even if you did not install the device software on your computer.  
▲ Click the Information tab, click Webscan in the left pane, make selections for  
Image Type and Document Size, and then click Scan or Preview.  
For more information on the embedded Web server, see Embedded Web server.  
Scan from a TWAIN-compliant or a WIA-compliant program  
The device is TWAIN-complaint and WIA-compliant and works with programs that  
support TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant scanning devices. While you are in a  
TWAIN-compliant or WIA-compliant program, you can gain access to the scanning  
feature and scan an image directly into the program.  
TWAIN is supported for all Windows and Mac OS operating systems, for both network  
connections and direct connections.  
For Windows operating systems, WIA is supported only for Windows XP direct  
connections. It is not supported for the Mac OS.  
Use Webscan via embedded Web server  
55  
           
Chapter 6  
To scan from a TWAIN-compliant program  
Generally, a software program is TWAIN-compliant if it has a command such as  
Acquire, File Acquire, Scan, Import New Object, Insert from, or Scanner. If you  
are unsure whether the program is compliant or you do not know what the command is  
called, see the software program Help or documentation.  
Start the scan from within the TWAIN-compliant program. See the software program  
Help or documentation for information about the commands and steps to use.  
NOTE: If you start a TWAIN scan while a fax is being received, an error message  
will be displayed and the scan is not performed. Wait until the fax has been  
received and then restart the scan.  
To scan from a WIA-compliant program  
Generally, a software program is WIA-compliant if it has a command such as Picture/  
From Scanner or Camera in the Insert or File menu. If you are unsure whether the  
program is compliant or you do not know what the command is called, see the  
software program Help or documentation.  
Start the scan from within the WIA-compliant program. See the software program Help  
or documentation for information about the commands and steps to use.  
Edit a scanned original  
You can edit a scanned image using the HP Photosmart Software. You can also edit a  
scanned document by using your Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software.  
Edit a scanned photo or graphic  
You can edit a scanned photo or graphic using the HP Photosmart Software. Use this  
software to adjust the brightness, contrast, color saturation, and more. You can also  
rotate the image using the HP Photosmart Software.  
For more information, see the onscreen HP Photosmart Software Help.  
Edit a scanned document using optical character recognition (OCR) software  
You can use OCR software to import scanned text into your preferred word-processing  
program for editing. This allows you to edit faxes, letters, newspaper clippings, and  
many other documents.  
You can specify the word-processing program that you want to use for editing. If the  
word-processing icon is not present or active, either you do not have word-processing  
software installed on your computer, or the scanner software did not recognize the  
program during the installation. See the onscreen Help for the HP photo and imaging  
software for information about how to create a link to the word-processing program.  
The OCR software does not support scanning colored text. Colored text is always  
converted to black-and-white text before being sent to OCR. Thus, all text in the final  
document is in black and white, regardless of the original color.  
Because of the complexity of some word-processing programs and their interaction  
with the device, it is sometimes preferable to scan to Wordpad (a Windows  
56  
Scan  
             
accessory), and then cut and paste the text into the preferred word-processing  
program.  
Change scan settings  
To change scan settings  
•
HP Device Manager (Mac OS): Launch HP Device Manager, click Information  
and Settings, and then select Scan Preferences from the drop-down list.  
•
Windows: Open the device software, select Settings, select Scan Settings and  
Preferences, then select from the available options and make your selections.  
Cancel a scan job  
▲ Press Cancel on the control panel.  
Change scan settings  
57  
       
7 Work with memory devices  
(some models only)  
The device comes with a memory card reader that can read several types of digital  
camera memory cards. You can use the device to save photos from these memory  
cards. You can also print a proof sheet, which shows thumbnail views of photos that  
are stored on a memory card.  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Insert a memory card  
Connect a digital camera  
Connect a storage device  
View photos  
Print photos from the control panel  
Save photos to your computer  
Insert a memory card  
If your digital camera uses a memory card to store photos, you can insert the memory  
card into the device to print or save your photos.  
CAUTION: Attempting to remove a memory card while it is being accessed can  
damage files on the card. You can safely remove a card only when the photo light  
is not blinking. Also, never insert more than one memory card at a time as this can  
also damage files on the memory cards.  
The device supports the memory cards described below. Each type of memory card  
can only be inserted in the appropriate slot for that card.  
1
2
3
4
CompactFlash (types I and II)  
Secure Digital, MultimediaCard (MMC), Secure MMC  
xD  
Memory Stick, MagicGate Memory Stick, Memory Stick Duo, and Memory Stick Pro  
58  
Work with memory devices (some models only)  
         
(continued)  
5
Front universal serial bus (USB) port (PictBridge-enabled)  
To insert a memory card  
1. Turn the memory card so that the label faces left, and the contacts are facing the  
device.  
2. Insert the memory card into the corresponding memory card slot.  
Connect a digital camera  
The PictBridge-enabled front USB port is located beneath the memory card slots.  
NOTE: If your USB device does not fit into this port due to size limitations, or if  
the connector on the device is shorter than 11 millimeters, you will need to  
purchase a USB extension cable in order to use your device with this port.  
Camera-selected photos are photos you marked for printing with your digital camera.  
Depending on your camera, the camera might identify page layout, number of copies,  
rotation, and other print settings.  
59  
Connect a digital camera  
     
Chapter 7  
The device supports two industry-standard formats, PictBridge and Digital Print Order  
Format (DPOF) file format 1.1, so you do not have to reselect the photos to print.  
•
The PictBridge standard saves the print instructions on the camera itself. In order  
to print photos using PictBridge, you need to put the camera into PictBridge mode,  
and then plug the camera into the front USB port of the device with a USB cable.  
•
The DPOF standard saves the print instructions as a file on your memory card. In  
order to print photos from a DPOF file, you need to remove the memory card from  
your camera and then insert the memory card into the appropriate slot on the  
device.  
When you print camera-selected photos, the device print settings do not apply; the  
PictBridge or DPOF settings for page layout and number of copies override those of  
the device.  
NOTE: Not all digital cameras enable you to tag your photos for printing. See the  
documentation that came with your digital camera to see if your camera supports  
the PictBridge standard or DPOF file format 1.1.  
To print camera-selected photos using the PictBridge standard  
1. Connect your digital camera to the front USB port on the device using the USB  
cable supplied with your camera.  
2. Turn on your camera and make sure it is in PictBridge mode.  
NOTE: Check your camera documentation to verify how to change the USB  
mode to PictBridge. Different cameras use different terms to describe  
PictBridge mode. For instance, some cameras have a digital camera setting  
and a disk drive setting. In this instance, the digital camera setting is the  
PictBridge mode setting.  
To print camera-selected photos using the DPOF standard  
1. Insert your memory card into the appropriate slot on the device.  
2. When prompted, do one of the following:  
•
Press OK to print all DPOF-tagged photos.  
The device prints all DPOF-tagged photos.  
Press the arrow keys to highlight No, and then press OK.  
This bypasses DPOF printing.  
•
60  
Work with memory devices (some models only)  
 
Connect a storage device  
You can connect a storage device such as a keychain drive, portable hard drive, or a  
digital camera in storage mode to the front USB port. The front USB port is located  
beneath the memory card slots.  
NOTE: Digital cameras that are in storage mode can be attached to the front USB  
port. The device treats cameras that are in this mode as a normal storage device.  
Digital cameras in storage mode are referred to as storage devices throughout this  
section.  
If your USB device does not fit into this port due to size limitations, or if the  
connector on the device is shorter than 11 millimeters, you will need to purchase a  
USB extension cable in order to use your device with this port. For more  
information on supported USB devices, see Supported devices.  
Check your camera documentation to verify how to change the USB mode to  
storage mode. Different cameras use different terms to describe the storage mode.  
For instance, some cameras have a digital camera setting and a disk drive  
setting. In this instance, the disk drive setting is the storage mode setting. If  
storage mode does not work on your camera, you might need to upgrade the  
camera firmware. For more information, see the documentation that came with the  
camera.  
Once you have connected the storage device, you can do the following with the files  
that are stored on your storage device:  
•
•
•
•
Transfer the files to your computer  
View photos (color display only)  
Edit photos using the control panel (color display only)  
Print photos  
CAUTION: Never attempt to disconnect a storage device while it is being  
accessed. Doing so can damage files on the storage device. You can safely  
remove a storage device only when the status light next to the memory card slots  
is not blinking.  
61  
Connect a storage device  
   
Chapter 7  
View photos  
You can view photos on the color display of your device. You can also view photos  
using the HP Photosmart Software.  
View photos (color display models only)  
You can view and select photos on the color display of your device.  
To view a photo  
1. Insert the memory card into the appropriate slot on your device, or connect a  
storage device to the front USB port.  
2. Press Photo Menu.  
The Photosmart Express menu appears. By default, View & Print is highlighted.  
3. Press the arrow keys until the photo you want to view appears on the color display.  
TIP: You can press and hold down the arrow keys to quickly navigate through  
all photos.  
View photos using your computer  
You can view and edit photos using the HP Photosmart Software that came with your  
device.  
For more information, see the onscreen HP Photosmart Software Help.  
Print photos from the control panel  
The device enables you to print photos directly from your memory card or storage  
device without first transferring the files to a computer. You can print borderless photos  
(one per sheet of paper) or you can print multiple photos on a single sheet of paper.  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
•
•
Print photos using a proof sheet  
Print panoramic photos  
Print passport photos  
Print video action photos  
Print photos using a proof sheet  
A proof sheet is a simple and convenient way to select photos and make prints directly  
from a memory card or storage device without a computer. A proof sheet (which might  
be several pages long) shows thumbnail views of the stored photos. The file name,  
index number, and date appear under each thumbnail.  
62  
Work with memory devices (some models only)  
               
Proof sheets are also a quick way to create a printed catalog of your photos.  
NOTE: From the device, you can only access JPEG and TIFF image files. To  
print other types of files, transfer the files from your memory card or storage device  
to your computer and use the HP Photosmart Software.  
Printing photos from a proof sheet requires three steps:  
•
•
•
Print a proof sheet of the photos on your memory card or storage device  
Complete the proof sheet  
Scan the proof sheet  
To print a proof sheet  
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate slot on the device, or connect a storage  
device to the front USB port.  
2. Choose the appropriate display:  
For color display models  
a. Press the Photo Menu button, and then select View & Print.  
When you press OK, the most recent photo appears on the display.  
b. Press OK to display the Print Menu.  
c. Press the arrow keys to select Projects.  
d. Press the arrow keys to select Proof Sheet.  
e. Press the arrow keys to select Print Proof Sheet, and then press OK.  
f. Press the arrow keys to select the appropriate Paper Size and Paper Type.  
For two-line display models  
a. Press the Photo Menu button.  
A message displays with the number of files found on the card or storage  
device.  
b. Press the Proof Sheet button, press the arrow keys to select Print, and then  
press OK.  
63  
Print photos from the control panel  
Chapter 7  
To complete a proof sheet  
1. Select the photos to print by using a dark pen or pencil to fill in the circles located  
under the thumbnail images on the proof sheet. If you want to print more than one  
copy of a photo, fill in the second or third circle. You can print up to three copies of  
each selected photo.  
TIP: If you want to print all the photos on the memory card, fill in the Select  
All Photos circle below the layout options in step 2 of the proof sheet. One  
copy of each photo prints.  
2. Select one layout style by filling in a circle in step 2 of the proof sheet.  
NOTE: If you need more control over print settings than the proof sheet  
provides, you can print photos directly from the control panel.  
3. (Optional) If you want to print a date/time stamp on your photos, fill in the Date  
Stamp circle below the layout options in step 2 of the proof sheet.  
To scan a completed proof sheet  
1. Load the proof sheet print-side down on the right-front corner of the glass. Make  
sure the sides of the proof sheet touch the right and front edges. Close the lid.  
2. Make sure the same memory card or storage device you used to print the proof  
sheet is still inserted in the device when you scan that proof sheet.  
3. Make sure you have photo media loaded into the device.  
64  
Work with memory devices (some models only)  
   
4. Press the Photo Menu button.  
5. Choose the appropriate display:  
For color display models  
a. Press the arrow keys to select View & Print, and then press OK.  
b. Press the arrow keys to select Projects, and then select Proof Sheet.  
c. Press the arrow keys to select Scan Proof Sheet, and then press OK.  
d. When prompted, select the paper size and paper type, and then press OK.  
For two-line display models  
▲ Press the Proof Sheet button, press the arrow keys to select Scan, and then  
press OK.  
The device scans the proof sheet and prints the selected photos.  
Print panoramic photos  
The device enables you to select multiple panoramic photos from your memory card or  
storage device and print them.  
NOTE: The device will not stitch multiple photos together to create a panoramic  
photo, you must use another software application, such as HP Photosmart software.  
To print a panoramic photo  
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate slot on the device, or connect a storage  
device to the front USB port.  
2. Press Photo Menu.  
The Photosmart Express menu appears. By default, View & Print is highlighted.  
3. Press OK to select View & Print.  
When you press OK, the most recent photo appears on the display.  
4. Press the arrow keys to scroll through the photos on your memory card or storage  
device.  
5. When the photo you want to print appears, press OK.  
The Print menu appears.  
6. Press the arrow keys to highlight Projects, and then press OK.  
The Projects menu appears.  
7. Press the arrow keys to highlight Panorama Prints, and then press OK.  
8. When prompted, load 10 x 30 cm (4 x 12 inch) panorama photo paper in the input  
tray, and then press OK.  
When you press OK, the selected photo reappears.  
9. (Optional) Change print settings or select additional photos to print.  
To print more than one copy of the selected photo  
a. Press OK to display the selection menu.  
b. Press the arrow keys to highlight Number of Copies, and then press OK.  
c. Press the arrow keys to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then  
press OK.  
65  
Print photos from the control panel  
   
Chapter 7  
To edit the selected photo before printing  
a. Press OK to display the selection menu.  
b. Press the arrow keys to highlight Edit, and then press OK.  
To select additional photos for printing  
a. Press the arrow keys to scroll through the photos on your memory card or  
storage device.  
b. When the photo you want to print appears, press OK.  
c. Press OK to select Select to Print.  
d. Repeat these steps for each photo you want to print.  
10. When you are done changing print settings and selecting photos, press OK to  
display the selection menu.  
11. Press the arrow keys to highlight Done Selecting, and then press OK.  
The Print Summary screen appears.  
12. Press the arrow keys to highlight one of the following options, and then press OK.  
Print Options  
Enables you to manually specify the type of paper on which you are  
printing and whether you want to print a date and time stamp on your  
photo.  
By default, the Date Stamp setting is set to Off. If you want, you can  
change the default of this setting with the Set New Defaults option.  
Print Preview  
Displays a preview of what your printed page will look like. This  
(color display only) enables you to verify your settings before printing and wasting paper  
and ink on potential mistakes.  
Print Now  
Prints your photos with the size and layout you selected.  
Print passport photos  
You can print your own passport-size photos from your memory card or storage  
device. If you have questions on guidelines or restrictions for passport photos, contact  
a local passport service agency.  
To print passport photos  
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate slot on the device, or connect a storage  
device to the front USB port.  
The Photosmart Express menu appears. By default, View & Print is highlighted.  
2. Press OK to select View & Print.  
When you press OK, the most recent photo appears on the display.  
3. Press the arrow keys to scroll through the photos on your memory card or storage  
device.  
4. When the photo you want to print appears, press OK.  
The Print menu appears.  
5. Press the arrow keys to highlight Projects, and then press OK.  
The Projects menu appears.  
6. Press the arrow keys to highlight Passport Photos, and then press OK.  
66  
Work with memory devices (some models only)  
   
7. Press the arrow keys to highlight the size you want to print, and then press OK.  
When you press OK, the selected photo reappears.  
8. (Optional) Change print settings or select additional photos to print.  
To print more than one copy of the selected photo  
a. Press OK to display the selection menu.  
b. Press the arrow keys to highlight Number of Copies, and then press OK.  
c. Press the arrow keys to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then  
press OK.  
To edit the selected photo before printing  
a. Press OK to display the selection menu.  
b. Press the arrow keys to highlight Edit, and then press OK.  
To select additional photos for printing  
a. Press the arrow keys to scroll through the photos on your memory card or  
storage device.  
b. When the photo you want to print appears, press OK.  
c. Press OK to select Select to Print.  
d. Repeat these steps for each photo you want to print.  
9. When you are done changing print settings and selecting photos, press OK to  
display the selection menu.  
10. Press the arrow keys to highlight Done Selecting, and then press OK.  
The Print Summary screen appears.  
11. Press the arrow keys to highlight one of the following options, and then press OK.  
Print Options  
Enables you to manually specify the type of paper on which you are  
printing and whether you want to print a date and time stamp on your  
photo.  
By default, the Paper Type is set to Plain and the Date Stamp  
setting is set to Off. If you want, you can change the defaults of these  
settings with the Set New Defaults option.  
Print Preview  
Displays a preview of what your printed page will look like. This  
(color display only) enables you to verify your settings before printing and wasting paper  
and ink on potential mistakes.  
Print Now  
Prints your photos with the size and layout you selected.  
Print video action photos  
You can use the Video Action Prints option to print a sequence of photos from a  
video file on a memory card or a storage device. This option prints nine frames of a  
67  
Print photos from the control panel  
   
Chapter 7  
video on one sheet of paper in the order that they appear in the video. The video  
frames are automatically selected by your device.  
To create video action prints  
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate slot on the device, or connect a storage  
device to the front USB port.  
The Photosmart Express menu appears. By default, View & Print is highlighted.  
2. Press OK to select View & Print.  
When you press OK, the most recent photo appears on the display.  
3. Press the arrow keys to scroll through the photos and videos on your memory card  
or storage device.  
4. When the video you want to print appears, press OK.  
The Print menu appears.  
5. Press the arrow keys to highlight Projects, and then press OK.  
The Projects menu appears.  
6. Press the arrow keys to highlight Video Action Prints, and then press OK.  
7. Press the arrow keys to highlight the size you want to print, and then press OK.  
8. Press the arrow keys to highlight the type of paper you are printing on, and then  
press OK.  
9. The video reappears, press OK to continue.  
10. (Optional) Edit the video or print the video.  
To edit the selected photo before printing  
a. Press OK to display the selection menu.  
b. Press the arrow keys to highlight Edit, and then press OK.  
To print now  
▲ Select Print Now, press OK.  
Save photos to your computer  
After you take photos with your digital camera, you can print them immediately or save  
them to your computer. To save the photos to your computer, remove the memory  
card from your digital camera and insert it in the appropriate memory card slot on the  
device.  
You can also save photos from a storage device (such as a digital camera or keychain  
drive) by plugging the device into the front USB port on the device.  
68  
Work with memory devices (some models only)  
   
To save photos  
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate slot on the device, or connect a storage  
device to the front USB port.  
2. Press Photo Menu.  
3. Choose the appropriate display:  
For color display models  
a. Press the arrow keys and select Save.  
b. Press the arrow keys and select Transfer to computer, and then select the  
name of your computer.  
c. Follow the onscreen prompts on your computer to save the photos to your  
computer.  
For two-line display models  
a. Press the arrow keys and select Photo Transfer, and then press OK.  
b. Press the arrow keys and select Yes.  
c. Press the arrow keys and select Transfer to computer, and then select the  
name of your computer.  
d. Follow the onscreen prompts on your computer to save the photos to your  
computer.  
69  
Save photos to your computer  
8
Fax (some models only)  
You can use the device to send and receive faxes, including color faxes. You can  
schedule faxes to be sent at a later time and set up speed-dials to send faxes quickly  
and easily to frequently used numbers. From the control panel, you can also set a  
number of fax options, such as resolution and the contrast between lightness and  
darkness on the faxes you send.  
If the device is directly connected to a computer, you can use the HP photo and  
imaging software to perform fax procedures that are not available from the control  
panel. For more information about using the HP photo and imaging software, see Use  
the HP photo and imaging software.  
NOTE: Before you begin faxing, make sure you have set up the device properly  
for faxing. You might have already done this as part of the initial setup, by using  
either the control panel or the software that came with the device. You can verify  
the fax is set up correctly by running the fax setup test from the control panel. To  
run the fax test, press Setup, select Tools, select Run fax test, and then press OK.  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Send a fax  
Receive a fax  
Change fax settings  
Fax over the Internet  
Test fax setup  
Use reports  
Cancel a fax  
Send a fax  
You can send a fax in a variety of ways. Using the control panel, you can send a black-  
and-white or color fax. You can also send a fax manually from an attached phone.  
This allows you to speak with the recipient before sending the fax.  
Send a basic fax  
You can easily send a single- or multiple-page black-and-white fax by using the control  
panel.  
NOTE: If you need printed confirmation that your faxes were successfully sent,  
enable fax confirmation before sending any faxes.  
TIP: You can also send a fax manually from a phone or by using monitor dialing.  
These features allow you to control the pace of your dialing. They are also useful  
when you want to use a calling card to charge the call and you have to respond to  
tone prompts while dialing.  
70  
Fax (some models only)  
           
To send a basic fax from the control panel  
1. Load your originals. For additional information, see Load media.  
NOTE: If you are sending a multiple-page fax, you must load the originals in  
the document feeder tray. You cannot fax a multiple-page document from the  
glass.  
2. Enter the fax number by using the keypad, press Speed Dial or a one-touch speed  
dial button to select a speed dial, or press Redial/Pause to redial the last number  
dialed.  
TIP: To add a pause in the fax number you are entering, press Redial/Pause,  
or press the Symbols (*) button repeatedly, until a dash (-) appears on the  
display.  
3. Press START FAX Black or START FAX Color.  
•
If the device detects an original loaded in the automatic document feeder,  
it sends the document to the number you entered.  
•
If the device does not detect an original loaded in the automatic  
document feeder, the Fax from glass? prompt appears. Make sure your  
original is loaded print-side down on the glass, and then select Yes.  
TIP: If the recipient reports issues with the quality of the fax you sent, you can  
try changing the resolution or contrast of your fax.  
Send a fax manually from a phone  
You can send a fax from a telephone on the same phone line if you prefer to use the  
keypad on your phone, instead of the keypad on the control panel of the device. You  
can do this by plugging in a phone into the 2–EXT port on the back of the device.  
When you send a fax manually, you can hear the dial tones, telephone prompts, or  
other sounds through the handset on your telephone. This makes it easy for you to  
use a calling card to send your fax.  
Depending on how the recipient has their fax machine set up, the recipient might  
answer the phone, or the fax machine might take the call. If a person answers the  
phone, you can speak with the recipient before sending the fax. If a fax machine  
answers the call, you can send the fax directly to the fax machine when you hear the  
fax tones from the receiving fax machine.  
To send a fax manually from a phone  
1. Load your originals. For additional information, see Load media.  
NOTE: This feature is not supported if you load your originals on the glass.  
You must load your originals in the document feeder tray.  
2. Dial the number by using the keypad on the phone that is connected to the device.  
NOTE: Do not use the keypad on the control panel of the device when  
manually sending a fax. You must use the keypad on your phone to dial the  
recipient's number.  
71  
Send a fax  
     
Chapter 8  
3. If the recipient answers the telephone, you can engage in a conversation before  
sending your fax.  
NOTE: If a fax machine answers the call, you will hear fax tones from the  
receiving fax machine. Proceed to the next step to transmit the fax.  
4. When you are ready to send the fax, press START FAX Black or START FAX  
Color.  
NOTE: If prompted, select Send Fax, and then press START FAX Black or  
START FAX Color again.  
If you were speaking with the recipient before sending the fax, inform the recipient  
that they should press Start on their fax machine after they hear fax tones.  
The telephone line is silent while the fax is transmitting. At this point, you can hang  
up the telephone. If you want to continue speaking with the recipient, remain on  
the line until the fax transmission is complete.  
Send a fax using monitor dialing  
Monitor dialing allows you to dial a number from the control panel as you would dial a  
regular telephone. When you send a fax using monitor dialing, you can hear the dial  
tones, telephone prompts, or other sounds through the speakers on the device. This  
enables you to respond to prompts while dialing, as well as control the pace of your  
dialing.  
TIP: If you do not enter your calling card PIN fast enough, the device might start  
sending fax tones too soon and cause your PIN not to be recognized by the calling  
card service. If this is the case, you can create a speed dial entry to store the PIN  
for your calling card.  
NOTE: Make sure the volume is turned on, or you will not hear a dial tone.  
To send a fax using monitor dialing from the control panel  
1. Load your originals. For additional information, see Load media.  
NOTE: If you are sending a multiple-page fax, you must load the originals  
print-side up in the document feeder tray. You cannot fax a multiple-page  
document from the glass. For additional information, see Load media.  
2. Press START FAX Black or START FAX Color.  
•
If the device detects an original loaded in the automatic document feeder,  
you will hear a dial tone.  
•
If the device does not detect an original loaded in the automatic  
document feeder, the Fax from glass? prompt appears. Make sure that your  
original is loaded on the glass, and then select Yes.  
72  
Fax (some models only)  
   
3. When you hear the dial tone, enter the number by using the keypad on the control  
panel.  
4. Follow any prompts that might occur.  
TIP: If you are using a calling card to send a fax and you have your calling  
card PIN stored as a speed dial, when prompted to enter your PIN, press  
Speed Dial or a one-touch speed dial button to select the speed dial entry  
where you have your PIN stored.  
Your fax is sent when the receiving fax machine answers.  
Send a fax using the broadcast fax option (color display models only)  
You can send a fax to multiple recipients without first setting up a group speed dial.  
NOTE: The list of recipients you specify for this fax is not saved and only works  
for sending faxes in black. If you intend to send other faxes to the same recipient  
list, you should create a group speed dial list. For more information, see Set up fax  
numbers as speed-dial entries or groups  
To broadcast a fax to multiple recipients from the control panel  
1. Press Fax Menu and select Broadcast Fax.  
2. Enter a fax number by using the keypad, or use the arrow keys to access speed  
dials.  
NOTE: You can add up to 20 individual fax numbers.  
3. Press START FAX Black.  
4. When prompted, load your originals print side up and top first in the center of the  
document feeder tray. For additional information, see Load media.  
5. Press START FAX Black again.  
Receive a fax  
You can receive faxes automatically or manually. If you turn off the Auto Answer  
option, you must receive faxes manually. If you turn on the Auto Answer option (the  
default setting), the device automatically answers incoming calls and receives faxes  
after the number of rings that are specified by the Rings to Answer setting. (The  
default Rings to Answer setting is five rings.)  
If you receive a legal-size fax and the device is not currently set to use legal-size  
paper, the device reduces the fax so that it fits on the paper that is loaded. If you have  
disabled the Automatic Reduction feature, the device prints the fax on two pages.  
Receive a fax manually  
When you are on the phone, the person you are speaking with can send you a fax  
while you are still connected. This is referred to as manual faxing. Use the instructions  
in this section to receive a manual fax.  
73  
Receive a fax  
           
Chapter 8  
You can receive faxes manually from a phone that is:  
•
•
Directly connected to the device (on the 2-EXT port)  
On the same phone line, but not directly connected to the device  
To receive a fax manually  
1. Make sure the device is turned on and you have paper loaded in the input tray.  
2. Remove any originals from the document feeder tray.  
3. Set the Rings to Answer setting to a high number to allow you to answer the  
incoming call before the device answers. Or, turn off the Auto Answer setting so  
that the device does not automatically answer incoming calls.  
4. If you are currently on the phone with the sender, instruct the sender to press Start  
on their fax machine.  
5. When you hear fax tones from a sending fax machine, do the following:  
a. Press START FAX Black or START FAX Color on the control panel.  
b. When prompted, select Fax Receive.  
c. After the device begins to receive the fax, you can hang up the phone or  
remain on the line. The phone line is silent during fax transmission.  
Set up backup fax reception  
Depending on your preference and security requirements, you can set up the device to  
store all the faxes it receives, only the faxes it receives while the device is in an error  
condition, or none of the faxes it receives.  
The following Backup Fax Reception modes are available:  
On  
The default setting. When Backup Fax Reception is On, the device  
stores all received faxes in memory. This enables you to reprint up to  
eight of the most recently printed faxes if they are still saved in memory.  
NOTE: When device memory is low, it overwrites the oldest, printed  
faxes as it receives new faxes. If the memory becomes full of unprinted  
faxes, the device stops answering incoming fax calls.  
NOTE: If you receive a fax that is too large, such as a very detailed  
color photo, it might not be stored in memory due to memory limitations.  
On Error Only  
Causes the device to store faxes in memory only if an error condition  
exists that prevents the device from printing the faxes (for example, if the  
device runs out of paper). The device continues to store incoming faxes  
as long as there is memory available. (If the memory becomes full, the  
device stops answering incoming fax calls.) When the error condition is  
resolved, the faxes stored in memory print automatically, and then they  
are deleted from memory.  
Off  
Faxes are never stored in memory. For example, you might want to turn  
off Backup Fax Reception for security purposes. If an error condition  
occurs that prevents the device from printing (for example, the device  
runs out of paper), the device stops answering incoming fax calls.  
74  
Fax (some models only)  
   
NOTE: If Backup Fax Reception is enabled and you turn off the device, all faxes  
stored in memory are deleted, including any unprinted faxes that you might have  
received while the device was in an error condition. You must contact the senders  
to ask them to resend any unprinted faxes. For a list of the faxes you have  
received, print the Fax Log. The Fax Log is not deleted when the device is turned  
off.  
To set backup fax reception from the control panel  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Select Advance Fax Setup, and then select Backup Fax Reception.  
3. Press the right arrow button to select On, On Error Only, or Off.  
4. Press OK.  
To set backup fax reception via the embedded Web server  
▲ Select the Settings tab, select Fax from the left pane, select the Advanced sub-  
tab, and then select On in the Backup Fax Reception drop-down menu.  
Reprint received faxes from memory  
If you set the Backup Fax Reception mode to On, the received faxes are stored in  
memory, whether the device has an error condition or not.  
NOTE: After the memory becomes full, the oldest, printed faxes are overwritten  
as new faxes are received. If all the stored faxes are unprinted, the device does  
not receive any fax calls until you print or delete the faxes from memory. You might  
also want to delete the faxes in memory for security or privacy purposes.  
Depending on the sizes of the faxes in memory, you can reprint up to eight of the most  
recently printed faxes, if they are still in memory. For example, you might need to  
reprint your faxes if you lost the copy of your last printout.  
To reprint faxes in memory from the control panel  
1. Make sure you have paper loaded in the input tray.  
2. Press Setup.  
3. Select Tools, and then select Reprint Faxes in Memory.  
The faxes are printed in the reverse order from which they were received with the  
most recently received fax printed first, and so on.  
4. If you want to stop reprinting the faxes in memory, press Cancel.  
To delete all the faxes in memory from the control panel  
▲ Depending on the model you have, do one of the following:  
•
Two–line display: Turn off the device by pressing the Power button.  
All faxes stored in memory are deleted from memory when you turn off the  
power.  
•
Color display: Press Setup, select Tools, and then select Clear Fax Log.  
75  
Receive a fax  
       
Chapter 8  
To clear fax logs via the embedded Web server  
▲ Select the Settings tab, select Fax from the left pane, select the Options sub-tab,  
and then click the Clear button under the Clear Fax Logs heading.  
Forward faxes to another number  
You can set up the device to forward your faxes to another fax number. A received  
color fax is forwarded in black and white.  
HP recommends that you verify the number you are forwarding to is a working fax line.  
Send a test fax to make sure the fax machine is able to receive your forwarded faxes.  
To forward faxes from the control panel  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Select Advance Fax Setup, and then select Fax Forwarding Black Only.  
3. Press the right arrow button until On-Forward or On-Print & Forward appears,  
and then press OK.  
•
Choose On-Forward if you want to forward the fax to another number without  
printing a backup copy on the device.  
NOTE: If the device is not able to forward the fax to the designated fax  
machine (for example, if it is not turned on), the device prints the fax. If you  
set up the device to print error reports for received faxes, it will also print an  
error report.  
•
Choose On-Print & Forward to print a backup copy of your received fax while  
forwarding the fax to another number.  
4. At the prompt, enter the number of the fax machine that will receive the forwarded  
faxes.  
5. At the prompt, enter a start time and date and a stop time and date.  
6. Press OK.  
Fax Forwarding appears on the control-panel display.  
If the device loses power when Fax Forwarding is set up, it saves the Fax  
Forwarding setting and phone number. When power is restored to the device, the  
Fax Forwarding setting is still On.  
NOTE: You can cancel fax forwarding by pressing Cancel on the control  
panel when the Fax Forwarding message is visible on the display, or you can  
select Off from the Fax Forwarding Black Only menu.  
To forward faxes using the embedded Web server  
1. Click the Settings tab, click Fax in the left pane, and then click the Options sub-  
tab.  
2. Select On — Print and Forward or On — Forward from the Fax Forwarding  
drop-down menu.  
3. Type a Fax Forward Number in the box, and then click Apply.  
76  
Fax (some models only)  
       
Block junk fax numbers  
If you subscribe to a caller ID service through your phone provider, you can block  
specific fax numbers so the device does not print faxes received from those numbers.  
When an incoming fax call is received, the device compares the number to the list of  
junk fax numbers to determine if the call should be blocked. If the number matches a  
number in the blocked fax numbers list, the fax is not printed. (The maximum number  
of fax numbers you can block varies by model.)  
NOTE: This feature is not supported in all countries/regions. If it is not supported  
in your country/region, Junk Fax Blocker Set Up does not appear in the Basic  
Fax Setup menu.  
Set the junk fax mode  
By default, Block Junk Fax mode is turned On. If you do not subscribe to a caller ID  
service through your phone provider, or do not want to use this feature, you can turn  
off this setting.  
To set the junk fax mode  
▲ Some models have a Block Junk Fax button. Depending on the model you have,  
do one of the following:  
•
•
Block Junk Fax button: Press the Junk Fax Blocker button, select the Block  
Junk Fax option, and then select On or Off.  
Color display menu: Press Setup, select Basic Fax Menu, select Junk Fax  
Blocker Setup, select Block Junk Fax, and then select On or Off.  
Add numbers to the junk fax list  
There are two ways to add a number to your junk list. You can select numbers from  
your caller ID history, or you can enter new numbers. The numbers in your junk list are  
blocked if Block Junk Fax mode is set to On.  
To select a number from the caller ID list  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Press Basic Fax Setup, and then press Junk Fax Blocker Setup.  
3. Press Add number to Junk List, and then press Select Number.  
4. Press the right arrow button to scroll through the numbers from which you have  
received faxes. When the number you want to block appears, press OK to select it.  
5. When the Select Another? prompt appears, do one of the following:  
•
If you want to add another number to the list of junk fax numbers, press  
Yes, and then repeat step 4 for each number you want to block.  
•
If you are done, press No.  
To manually enter a number to block  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Press Basic Fax Setup, and then press Junk Fax Blocker Setup.  
3. Press Add number to Junk List, and then press Enter Number.  
77  
Receive a fax  
       
Chapter 8  
4. Use the keypad to enter a fax number to block, and then press OK.  
Make sure you enter the fax number as it appears on the control-panel display,  
and not the fax number that appears on the fax header of the received fax, as  
these numbers can be different.  
5. When the Enter Another? prompt appears, do one of the following:  
•
If you want to add another number to the list of junk fax numbers, press  
Yes, and then repeat step 4 for each number you want to block.  
•
If you are done, press No.  
To enter numbers to block via the embedded Web server  
▲ Select the Settings tab, select Fax from the left pane, select the Blocked Fax sub-  
tab, and then enter numbers to block in the Fax Number fields. Click the Apply  
button.  
Remove numbers from the junk fax list  
If you no longer want to block a fax number, you can remove a number from your junk  
fax list.  
To remove numbers from the list of junk fax numbers  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Press Basic Fax Setup, and then press Junk Fax Blocker Setup.  
3. Press Remove Number from Junk List.  
4. Press the right arrow button to scroll through the numbers you have blocked.  
When the number you want to remove appears, press OK to select it.  
5. When the Delete Another? prompt appears, do one of the following:  
•
If you want to remove another number from the list of junk fax numbers,  
press Yes, and then repeat step 4 for each number you want to block.  
•
If you are done, press No.  
To remove numbers from the list of junk fax numbers via the embedded Web  
server  
▲ Open the embedded Web server. For more information, see To open the  
embedded Web server. Click the Settings tab, select Fax from the left pane, click  
the Junk Fax Blocker sub-tab, add or remove numbers to block in the Fax  
Number fields, and then click Apply.  
View a list of blocked fax numbers  
You can view a list of blocked fax numbers only from the embedded Web server,  
which requires a network connection.  
To view a list of blocked numbers via the embedded Web server  
▲ Open the embedded Web server. For more information, see To open the  
embedded Web server. Click the Settings tab, select Fax from the left pane, and  
then click the Junk Fax Blocker sub-tab.  
78  
Fax (some models only)  
         
Change fax settings  
After completing the steps in the getting started guide that came with the device, use  
the following steps to change the initial settings or to configure other options for faxing.  
Configure the fax header  
The fax header prints your name and fax number on the top of every fax you send. HP  
recommends that you set up the fax header by using the software that you installed  
with the device. You can also set up the fax header from the control panel, as  
described here.  
NOTE: In some countries/regions, the fax header information is a legal  
requirement.  
To set or change the fax header  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Press Basic Fax Setup, and then press Fax Header.  
3. Enter your personal or company name using the numeric keypad, and then press OK.  
4. Enter your fax number by using the numeric keypad, and then press OK.  
To set or change the fax header via the embedded Web server  
▲ Select the Settings tab, select Fax from the left pane, select the Basic sub-tab,  
and then enter the Fax Header Name and Fax Number. Click the Apply button.  
Set the answer mode (Auto answer)  
The answer mode determines whether the device answers incoming calls.  
•
Turn on the Auto Answer setting if you want the device to answer faxes  
automatically. The device answers all incoming calls and faxes.  
•
Turn off the Auto Answer setting if you want to receive faxes manually. You must  
be available to respond in person to the incoming fax call or the device does not  
receive faxes.  
To set the answer mode to manual or automatic via the control panel  
▲ Press Auto Answer to turn the light on or off, as appropriate for your setup.  
When the Auto Answer light is on, the device answers calls automatically. When  
the light is off, the it does not answer calls.  
To set the answer mode to manual or automatic via the embedded Web server  
1. Open the embedded Web server, click the Settings tab, click Fax in the left pane,  
and then click the Basic sub-tab.  
2. Select On or Off in the Auto Answer drop-down menu in the Other Basic Fax  
Settings section.  
79  
Change fax settings  
             
Chapter 8  
Set the number of rings before answering  
If you turn on the Auto Answer setting, you can specify how many rings occur before  
incoming calls are automatically answered.  
The Rings to Answer setting is important if you have an answering machine on the  
same phone line as the device, because you want the answering machine to answer  
the phone before the device does. The number of rings to answer for the device  
should be greater than the number of rings to answer for the answering machine.  
For example, set your answering machine to a low number of rings and the device to  
answer in the maximum number of rings. (The maximum number of rings varies by  
country/region.) In this setup, the answering machine answers the call and the device  
monitors the line. If the device detects fax tones, it receives the fax. If the call is a  
voice call, the answering machine records the incoming message.  
To set the number of rings before answering via the control panel  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Press Basic Fax Setup, and then press Rings to Answer.  
3. Enter the appropriate number of rings by using the keypad, or press the left or right  
arrow button to change the number of rings.  
4. Press OK to accept the setting.  
To set the number of rings before answering via the embedded Web server  
1. Open the embedded Web server, click the Settings tab, click Fax in the left pane  
and then click the Basic sub-tab.  
2. Select a number in the Rings-to-answer drop-down menu in the Other Basic Fax  
Settings section.  
Change the answer ring pattern for distinctive ring  
Many phone companies offer a distinctive ring feature that allows you to have several  
phone numbers on one phone line. When you subscribe to this service, each number  
is assigned a different ring pattern. You can set up the device to answer incoming calls  
that have a specific ring pattern.  
If you connect the device to a line with distinctive ring, have your telephone company  
assign one ring pattern to voice calls and another ring pattern to fax calls. HP  
recommends that you request double or triple rings for a fax number. When the device  
detects the specified ring pattern, it answers the call and receives the fax.  
If you do not have a distinctive ring service, use the default ring pattern, which is All  
Rings.  
To change the answer ring pattern for distinctive ring via the control panel  
1. Verify that the device is set to answer fax calls automatically.  
2. Press Setup.  
3. Press Advance Fax Setup, and then press Distinctive Ring.  
4. Press the right arrow button to select an option, and then press OK.  
When the phone rings with the ring pattern assigned to your fax line, the device  
answers the call and receives the fax.  
80  
Fax (some models only)  
       
To set the answer ring pattern via the embedded Web server  
▲ Click the Settings tab, click Fax in the left pane, click the Advanced sub-tab,  
select a ring pattern in the Distinctive Ring drop-down menu, and then click the  
Apply button.  
Set the fax error correction mode  
Typically, the device monitors the signals on the phone line while it is sending or  
receiving a fax. If it detects an error signal during the transmission and the error-  
correction setting is on, the device can request that a portion of the fax be resent.  
Turn off error correction only if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax, and  
you want to accept the errors in the transmission. Turning off the setting might be  
useful when you are trying to send a fax to another country/region or receive a fax  
from another country/region, or if you are using a satellite phone connection.  
To set the fax error-correction mode  
•
Embedded Web server (network connection): Open the embedded Web server,  
click the Settings tab, click Fax in the left pane, click the Advanced tab, select On  
or Off in the Error Correction Mode drop-down menu, and then click the Apply  
button.  
•
Control panel: Press Fax Menu, open the Advance Fax Setup menu, and then  
use the Error correction mode option.  
Set the dial type  
Use this procedure to set tone-dialing or pulse-dialing mode. The factory-set default is  
Tone. Do not change the setting unless you know that your phone line cannot use  
tone dialing.  
NOTE: The pulse-dialing option is not available in all countries/regions.  
To set the dial type  
•
Embedded Web server (network connection): Open the embedded Web server,  
click the Settings tab, click Fax in the left pane, click the Basic tab, make a  
selection in the Tone or Pulse Dialing drop-down menu, and then click the Apply  
button.  
•
Control panel: Press Setup, press Basic Fax Setup, and then use the Tone or  
Pulse Dialing option.  
Set the redial options  
If the device was unable to send a fax because the receiving fax machine did not  
answer or was busy, the device attempts to redial based on the settings for the busy-  
redial and no-answer-redial options. Use the following procedure to turn the options on  
or off.  
•
Busy redial: If this option is turned on, the device redials automatically if it  
receives a busy signal. The factory-set default for this option is ON.  
•
No answer redial: If this option is turned on, the device redials automatically if the  
receiving fax machine does not answer. The factory-set default for this option is OFF.  
81  
Change fax settings  
                 
Chapter 8  
To set the redial options  
•
Embedded Web server (network connection): Open the embedded Web server,  
click the Settings tab, click Fax in the left pane, and then click the Advanced tab.  
•
Control panel: Press Setup, press Advance Fax Setup, and then use the Busy  
Redial or No Answer Redial options.  
Set the fax speed  
You can set the fax speed used to communicate between your device and other fax  
machines when sending and receiving faxes. The default fax speed is Fast.  
If you use one of the following, setting the fax speed to a slower speed might be  
required:  
•
•
•
•
An Internet phone service  
A PBX system  
Fax over Internet Protocol (FoIP)  
An integrated services digital network (ISDN) service  
If you experience problems sending and receiving faxes, you might want to try setting  
the Fax Speed setting to Medium or Slow. The following table provides the available  
fax speed settings.  
Fax speed setting  
Fast  
Fax speed  
v.34 (33600 baud)  
v.17 (14400 baud)  
v.29 (9600 baud)  
Medium  
Slow  
To set the fax speed from the control panel  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Select Advanced Fax Setup, and then press Fax Speed.  
3. Select an option using the arrow keys, and then press OK.  
Fax over the Internet  
You may subscribe to a low cost phone service that allows you to send and receive  
faxes with your device by using the Internet. This method is called Fax over Internet  
Protocol (FoIP). You probably use a FoIP service (provided by your telephone  
company) if you:  
•
•
Dial a special access code along with the fax number, or  
Have an IP converter box that connects to the Internet and provides analog phone  
ports for the fax connection.  
NOTE: You can only send and receive faxes by connecting a phone cord to the  
port labeled "1-LINE" on the device and not from the Ethernet port. This means  
that your connection to the Internet must be done either through a converter box  
(which supplies regular analog phone jacks for fax connections) or your telephone  
company.  
82  
Fax (some models only)  
         
Some Internet faxing services do not work properly when the device is sending and  
receiving faxes at high speed (33600bps). If you experience problems sending and  
receiving faxes while using an Internet fax service, use a slower fax speed. You can  
do this by changing the Fax Speed setting from High (the default) to Medium. For  
information on changing this setting, see Set the fax speed.  
You should also check with your telephone company to make sure their Internet faxing  
service supports faxing.  
Test fax setup  
You can test your fax setup to check the status of the device and to make sure it is set  
up properly for faxing. Perform this test after you have completed setting up the device  
for faxing. The test does the following:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tests the fax hardware  
Verifies the correct type of phone cord is connected to the device  
Checks that the phone cord is plugged into the correct port  
Checks for a dial tone  
Checks for an active phone line  
Tests the status of your phone line connection  
The device prints a report with the results of the test. If the test fails, review the report  
for information on how to fix the problem and rerun the test.  
To test fax setup  
1. Set up the device for faxing according to your particular home or office setup  
instructions.  
2. Make sure the ink cartridges and printheads are installed, and that full-size paper  
is loaded in the input tray before starting the test.  
3. From the control panel, press Setup.  
4. Select Tools, and then select Run Fax Test.  
The device displays the status of the test on the display and prints a report.  
5. Review the report.  
•
If the test passes and you are still having problems faxing, check the fax  
settings listed in the report to verify the settings are correct. A blank or  
incorrect fax setting can cause problems faxing.  
•
If the test fails, review the report for more information on how to fix any  
problems found.  
Use reports  
You can set up the device to print error reports and confirmation reports automatically  
for each fax you send and receive. You can also manually print system reports as  
required; these reports provide useful system information about the device.  
By default, the device is set to print a report only if there is a problem sending or  
receiving a fax. A confirmation message that indicates whether a fax was successfully  
sent appears briefly on the control-panel display after each transaction.  
83  
Test fax setup  
       
Chapter 8  
Print fax confirmation reports  
If you require printed confirmation that your faxes were successfully sent, follow these  
instructions to enable fax confirmation before sending any faxes. Select either On Fax  
Send or Send & Receive.  
The default fax confirmation setting is Off. This means that a confirmation report is not  
printed for each fax sent or received. A confirmation message indicating whether a fax  
was successfully sent appears briefly on the control-panel display after each  
transaction.  
To enable fax confirmation  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Press Print Report, and then Fax Confirmation.  
3. Press the right arrow button to select one of the following, and then press OK.  
Off  
Does not print a fax confirmation report when you send and receive  
faxes successfully. This is the default setting.  
On Fax Send  
Prints a fax confirmation report for every fax you send.  
Prints a fax confirmation report for every fax you receive.  
Prints a fax confirmation report for every fax you send and receive.  
On Fax Receive  
Send & Receive  
TIP: If you choose On Fax Send or Send & Receive, and scan your fax to  
send from memory, you can include an image of the first page of the fax on the  
Fax Sent Confirmation report. Press Setup, press Fax Confirmation, and  
then press On Fax Send again. Select On from the Image on Fax Send  
Report menu.  
Print fax error reports  
You can configure the device so that it automatically prints a report when there is an  
error during transmission or reception.  
To set the device to print fax error reports automatically  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Press Print Report, and then press Fax Error Report.  
3. Press the right arrow button to select one of the following, and then press OK.  
Send & Receive  
Off  
Prints whenever a fax error occurs. This is the default setting.  
Does not print any fax error reports.  
On Fax Send  
On Fax Receive  
Prints whenever a transmission error occurs.  
Prints whenever a receiving error occurs.  
84  
Fax (some models only)  
       
Print and view the fax log  
You can print a log of faxes that have been received and sent by the device. Each  
entry in the log contains the following information:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transmission date and time  
Type (whether received or sent)  
Fax number  
Duration  
Number of pages  
Result (status) of transmission  
The logs list faxes that have been sent from the control panel and all faxes that have  
been received.  
To view the fax log from the embedded Web server  
▲ On the Information tab, click Log in the left pane, then click the Fax Log sub-tab.  
The log lists faxes that have been sent from the HP photo and imaging software and  
all faxes that have been received.  
To view the fax log from the HP photo and imaging software  
1. At the computer, open the HP photo and imaging software. For more information,  
see Use the HP photo and imaging software.  
2. See the onscreen Help for the HP photo and imaging software for further  
instructions.  
The log lists faxes that have been sent from the control panel and the HP photo and  
imaging software and all faxes that have been received.  
To print the fax log from the control panel  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Press the arrow key to move down to Print Report, and then press OK.  
3. Press the arrow key to move down to Fax Log, and then press OK.  
4. Press OK again to print the log.  
Cancel a fax  
You can cancel a fax you are sending or receiving at any time.  
To cancel a fax  
▲ Press Cancel on the control panel to stop a fax you are sending or receiving. If the  
device does not stop faxing, press Cancel again.  
The device prints any pages it has already started printing and then cancels the  
remainder of the fax. This can take a few moments.  
To cancel a number you are dialing  
▲ Press Cancel to cancel a number you are currently dialing.  
Cancel a fax  
85  
       
9 Configure and manage  
This section is intended for the administrator or individual who is responsible for  
managing the device. This section contains information about the following topics.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manage the device  
Use device management tools  
Understand the self-test diagnostic page  
Understand the network configuration page  
Configure network options  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
Configure the device (Windows)  
Configure the device (Mac OS)  
Set up the device for wireless communication (some models only)  
Set up the device for Bluetooth communication  
Uninstall and reinstall the software  
Manage the device  
•
•
•
Overview of management tasks  
Monitor the device  
Administer the device  
Overview of management tasks  
The following table lists common tools that can be used to manage the device.  
Specific procedures might include other methods. For information about accessing  
and using the tools, see Use device management tools.  
NOTE: Mac OS users can use the control panel, the embedded Web server, and  
the HP Printer Utility. Windows users can use the control panel, the embedded  
Web server, the printer driver, the Toolbox, the HP Web Jetadmin, and  
myPrintMileage.  
For more information about the HP Web Jetadmin software, open the HP Web  
Jetadmin software and see its documentation. For more information about  
myPrintMileage, visit the myPrintMileage Web site.  
If you want  
to...  
use these tools...  
Control  
Embedded Toolbox  
HP Printer  
Utility  
(Mac OS)  
HP Web  
Jetadmin  
software  
myPrint-  
Mileage  
*
panel parts Web server (Windows)  
Monitor the device  
Status of  
supplies  
86  
Configure and manage  
             
(continued)  
If you want  
to...  
use these tools...  
Usage of  
supplies and  
media  
Operation and  
status  
Administer the device  
Device  
maintenance  
Device security  
Scanner bulb  
time  
Tray settings  
Device volume  
or control  
button volume  
settings  
Alerts and  
notifications  
* Available if myPrintMileage is installed.  
Monitor the device  
This section provides instructions for monitoring the device.  
Use this tool...  
Control panel  
to obtain the following information....  
Obtain information about the status of jobs  
that are being processed, the operating status  
of the device, and the status of ink cartridges  
and printheads.  
Embedded Web server  
Printer status information: Click the  
Information tab, and then click an option  
available on the left pane.  
•
•
•
Ink cartridge and printhead status:  
Click the Information tab, and then click  
Ink Supplies in the left pane.  
Accumulated ink and media usage:  
Click the Information tab, and then click  
Usage in the left pane.  
Toolbox (Windows)  
Ink cartridge information: Click the  
Estimated Ink Levels tab to view the ink-  
level information, and then scroll to display  
the Cartridge Details button. Click the  
Cartridge Details button to view information  
Manage the device  
87  
         
Chapter 9  
(continued)  
Use this tool...  
to obtain the following information....  
about replacement ink cartridges and  
expirations dates.  
NOTE: The ink levels shown are an  
estimate only. Actual ink volumes may vary.  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS)  
Ink cartridge information: Open the  
Information and Support panel and click  
Supplies Status.  
Administer the device  
This section provides information about administering the device and modifying  
settings.  
Use this tool...  
Control panel  
to do the following...  
Language and country/region: Press Setup,  
•
and then open the Preferences menu.  
Control panel volume: Press Setup, and then  
open the Preferences menu.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fax sound volume: Press Setup, and then  
select Fax Sound Volume.  
Automatic report printing: Press Setup, and  
then open the Advance Fax Setup menu.  
Set the dial type: Press Setup, and then open  
the Basic Fax Setup menu.  
Set up redial options: Press Setup, and then  
open the Advance Fax Setup menu.  
View the IP address of the device (see  
Change advanced network settings).  
Set the date and time: Press Setup, press  
Tools, and then press Date and Time.  
Set the scanner bulb time: Press Setup,  
select Preferences, and then select Set Bulb  
Time.  
Set embedded Web server password: Click  
the Settings tab, and then click Security in the  
left pane.  
Embedded Web server  
•
Change tray settings: Click the Settings tab,  
and then click Paper Handling in the left pane.  
•
•
Perform device maintenance tasks: Click the  
Settings tab, and then click Device Services  
in the left pane.  
Language and country/region: Click the  
Settings tab, and then click International in  
the left pane.  
•
•
Fax sound volume: Click the Settings tab,  
click Fax in the left pane, and then adjust the  
Fax Sound Volume option.  
88  
Configure and manage  
       
(continued)  
Use this tool...  
to do the following...  
Configure network settings: Click the  
Networking tab, and then click an option in the  
left pane.  
•
Set a static IP address: Click the Networking  
tab, and then click either Wired 802.3 or  
Wireless 802.11. In the IP Address  
Configuration section, select Manual IP and  
enter the static IP address. Enter the Manual  
Subnet Mask and Manual Default Gateway, if  
necessary, and then click Apply. For more  
information, see Troubleshooting tips and  
resources.  
•
NOTE: It is not recommended that you assign  
a static IP address to the device. However, a  
static IP address might resolve certain setup  
and printing problems, such as a conflict with a  
personal firewall.  
Configure Direct Digital Filing settings:  
Click the Settings tab, and then click Direct  
Digital Filing Speed-dial.  
•
•
•
Automatic fax report printing: Click the  
Settings tab, and then click Fax in the left  
pane. Then click the Advanced tab.  
Setting up the dial type: Click the Settings  
tab, and then click Fax in the left pane. Then  
click the Basic tab.  
Setting up redial options: Click the Settings  
tab, and then click Fax. Click the Advanced tab.  
•
•
Order supplies: On any tab, click the Order  
Supplies button, and then follow the onscreen  
instructions.  
Support: On any tab, click the Support button,  
and then select a support option.  
•
•
•
Configure Bluetooth settings: Click the  
Bluetooth tab.  
Set the date and time: Click the Settings tab,  
click Time Services in the left pane, type the  
necessary values in the fields, and then click  
Apply.  
Toolbox (Windows)  
Change tray settings: Click Paper Handling  
on the Services tab.  
•
•
Perform device maintenance tasks: Click the  
Services tab.  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS)  
Change tray settings: Click Paper Handling  
from the Printer Settings panel.  
•
•
Perform device maintenance tasks: Open  
the Information and Support panel, and then  
click the option for the task that you want to  
perform.  
Manage the device  
89  
   
Chapter 9  
Use device management tools  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Embedded Web server  
Toolbox (Windows)  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS)  
Network Printer Setup Utility (Mac OS)  
HP Web Jetadmin software  
HP Instant Support  
myPrintMileage  
Embedded Web server  
When the device is connected to a network, you can use the embedded Web server to  
view status information, change settings, and manage it from your computer.  
NOTE: For a list of system requirements for the embedded Web server, see  
Embedded Web server specifications.  
Some settings might be restricted by the requirement for a password.  
You can open and use the embedded Web server without being connected to the  
Internet; however, some features will not be available.  
To open the embedded Web server  
You can open the embedded Web server by using these methods:  
NOTE: To open the embedded Web server from the printer driver (Windows), or  
the HP Printer Utility (Mac OS), the device must be on a network and must have an  
IP address.  
•
Web browser: In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the IP address  
that has been assigned to the device.  
For example, if the IP address is 123.123.123.123, type the following address into  
the Web browser: http://123.123.123.123  
The IP address for the device is listed on the self-test diagnostic page. For more  
information, see Understand the network configuration page.  
After opening the embedded Web server, you can bookmark it so that you can  
return to it quickly in the future.  
•
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS): On the Printer Settings panel, click Additional  
Settings, and then click the Open Embedded Web Server button.  
90  
Configure and manage  
         
Embedded Web server pages  
The embedded Web server contains pages that you can use to view product  
information and change device settings. The pages also contain links to other e-  
services.  
Pages/buttons  
Contents  
Information page  
Shows status information about the device, its ink  
supplies and usage, and a log of device events  
(such as errors).  
Settings page  
Shows the settings that have been configured for  
the device and gives you the ability to change  
these settings.  
Networking page  
Shows network status and the network settings that  
have been configured for the device. These pages  
only appear if the device is connected to a network.  
For more information, see Configure network options.  
Bluetooth page  
Shows the Bluetooth settings that have been  
configured for the device and gives you the ability  
to change these settings.  
Support and Order Supplies buttons  
Support provides a number of support services,  
including e-services such as HP Instant Support,  
myPrintMileage. For more information, see HP  
Instant Support and myPrintMileage.  
Order Supplies connects you to online ordering of  
supplies.  
Toolbox (Windows)  
The Toolbox provides maintenance information about the device.  
NOTE: The Toolbox can be installed from the Starter CD by selecting the full  
installation option if the computer meets the system requirements.  
To open the Toolbox  
•
From the HP Solution Center, click the Settings menu, point to Print Settings,  
and then click Printer Toolbox.  
•
Right-click the HP Digital Imaging Monitor in the tray, point to Printer Model Name  
and then click Display Printer Toolbox.  
Use device management tools  
91  
           
Chapter 9  
Toolbox tabs  
The Toolbox contains the following tabs.  
Tabs  
Contents  
Estimated Ink Level  
Ink Level Information: Shows estimated ink  
level for each cartridge.  
•
NOTE: The ink levels shown are an estimate  
only. Actual ink volumes may vary.  
Shop Online: Provides access to a Web site  
from which you can order printing supplies for  
the device online.  
•
•
Order by Phone: Shows telephone numbers  
that you can call to order supplies for the  
device. Telephone numbers are not available  
for all countries/regions.  
Cartridge Details: Shows order numbers and  
expiration dates of the installed ink cartridges.  
•
Information  
Printer Information: Provides a link to  
myPrintMileage and shows the device hardware  
and printhead health information. Information tab  
options include:  
Hardware information  
myPrintmileage (if installed)  
HP Instant Support  
•
•
•
•
HP printhead health  
Services  
Print PQ (print quality) Diagnostic Page:  
Allows you to diagnose issues affecting the  
print quality of the device. For more  
information, see To print the print quality  
diagnostic page.  
•
Print Self-Test Diagnostic Page: Allows you  
to print the self-test diagnostic page of the  
device. This page contains information about  
the device and the supplies. For more  
information, see Understand the self-test  
diagnostic page.  
•
Align Printheads: Guides you through  
aligning the printheads. For more information,  
see To align the printheads.  
•
•
•
•
Clean Printheads: Guides you through  
cleaning the printheads. For more information,  
see To clean the printheads.  
Calibrate Linefeed: Allows you to perform  
linefeed calibration. For more information, see  
To calibrate the linefeed.  
Paper Handling: Allows you to set the tray  
lock and select a default tray (if Tray 2 is  
installed). For more information, see Configure  
trays.  
92  
Configure and manage  
       
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS)  
The HP Printer Utility contains tools to configure print settings, calibrate the device,  
clean the printheads, print the self-test diagnostic page, order supplies online, and find  
Web site support information.  
To open the HP Printer Utility  
1. From the Finder, select Computer from the Go menu.  
2. Select Library, and then select Printers.  
3. Select hp, select Utilities, and then select HP Printer Selector.  
4. Select the device and click Launch Utility.  
HP Printer Utility panels  
Information and Support panel  
•
Supplies Status: Shows the information about currently installed printheads and  
ink cartridges.  
•
•
Supply Info: Shows the ink cartridge replacement options.  
Device Information: Displays information about the model and serial number.  
Also allows you to print the self-test diagnostic page of the device. This page  
contains information about the device and the supplies. For more information, see  
Understand the self-test diagnostic page.  
•
Print Quality Diagnostics: Allows you to diagnose issues affecting the print  
quality of the device. For more information, see To print the print quality diagnostic  
page.  
•
•
•
•
Clean: Guides you through cleaning the printheads. For more information, see To  
clean the printheads.  
Align: Guides you through aligning the printheads. For more information, see To  
align the printheads.  
Calibrate Linefeed: Allows you to perform linefeed calibration. For more  
information, see To calibrate the linefeed.  
HP Support: Gain access to HP Web site where you can find support for the  
device, register the device, and find information about returning and recycling used  
printing supplies.  
Printer Settings panel  
•
Trays Configuration: Set the default media type and size for a tray, and set the  
tray priority. For more information, see Configure trays.  
•
Additional Settings: Launch the embedded Web server to change network  
settings. Configure IP settings for network connectivity.  
Use device management tools  
93  
         
Chapter 9  
Network Printer Setup Utility (Mac OS)  
This tool allows you to configure network settings for the device. You can configure  
wireless settings such as network location name and wireless mode, and wired  
settings such as TCP/IP address, router, and subnet mask.  
To open the Network Printer Setup Utility  
1. From the Finder, select Computer from the Go menu.  
2. Select Library, and then select Printers.  
3. Select hp, select Utilities, and then select Network Printer Setup Utility.  
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to configure network settings for the device.  
HP Web Jetadmin software  
The HP Web Jetadmin software is a Web-based management solution for remotely  
installing, configuring (both individually or in batch mode), monitoring status (including  
levels for supplies), conducting remote diagnostics, and troubleshooting a wide variety  
of HP and non-HP network peripherals.  
After the software is installed, you can gain access to it from anywhere within your  
intranet by using a standard Web browser. To get more information or to download the  
software, go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.  
HP Instant Support  
HP Instant Support is a suite of Web-based troubleshooting tools. It helps you quickly  
identify, diagnose, and resolve printing problems.  
HP Instant Support provides the following information about your device:  
•
Easy access to troubleshooting tips: Provides tips that are customized for your  
device.  
•
Resolution of specific device errors: Provides immediate access to information  
that can help you resolve error messages specific to your device. To see a  
description of the problem, as well as recommendations for solving or preventing  
the problem, click the link within the message.  
•
Notification of print driver updates: Alerts you when there is an update for the  
printer driver. A message appears on the HP Instant Support homepage; click the  
link within the message to go directly to the download section of the HP Web site.  
•
•
•
Obtaining support services: Provides a list of the support services that are  
available for your device.  
Managing ink and media usage (myPrintMileage): Helps you manage and  
forecast device supplies usage.  
Self diagnostic testing for your device: Runs a diagnostic test of your device.  
Select Printer on the Self Help menu on the Instant Support page to start  
diagnosing the devices. HP Instant Support checks the computer, and a list of  
configured devices appears. When you select the device that you want to  
diagnose, HP Instant Support can help you with tasks.  
94  
Configure and manage  
               
•
•
HP expert help online (Active Chat): Provides personalized help from an HP  
support expert over the Web at any time through real-time chat. Simply submit a  
question or a description of your problem. Your recent device history, system  
configuration, and any actions that you have attempted are automatically  
forwarded to HP (upon your approval) so that you will not need to describe the  
problem again.  
Knowledge database: Use the HP knowledge database to quickly find answers to  
your questions.  
Security and privacy  
When you use HP Instant Support, detailed device information, such as the serial  
number, error conditions, and status, is sent to HP. HP respects your privacy and  
manages this information according to the guidelines that are outlined in the HP  
Online Privacy Statement (welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/privacy.html).  
NOTE: To view all the data that is sent to HP, select Source (for Internet Explorer  
and Opera) or Page Source (for Netscape and Mozilla Firefox) from the View  
menu in your Web browser.  
To gain access to HP Instant Support  
•
•
Toolbox (Windows): Click the Information tab, and then click HP Instant Support.  
Embedded Web server: Click the Support button, then click HP Instant Support.  
NOTE: The Support button is available in all pages.  
NOTE: Do not bookmark the Web pages that are used to open HP Instant  
Support. If you bookmark the site and connect to it by using the bookmark, the  
pages do not contain the current information.  
myPrintMileage  
myPrintMileage is a service that HP provides to help you track and forecast your  
device usage and plan the purchase of supplies.  
To use myPrintMileage, you must have the following:  
•
•
Internet connection  
Device connected  
Use device management tools  
95  
           
Chapter 9  
On the myPrintMileage Web site, you can see the print analysis, such as the amount  
of ink you have used, whether you use more black or color ink, and the estimated  
number of pages you can print with the remaining amount of ink  
To gain access to myPrintMileage  
•
Embedded Web server: Click the Support button, and then click myPrintMileage.  
NOTE: The Support button is available in all pages.  
•
•
Toolbox (Windows): Click the Information tab, and then click myPrintMileage  
and follow the onscreen instructions.  
Windows taskbar: Right-click the HP Digital Imaging icon in the Windows  
taskbar, choose the device you wish to view, and then click myPrintMileage.  
NOTE: Do not bookmark the Web pages that are used to open myPrintMileage. If  
you bookmark the site and connect to it by using the bookmark, the pages do not  
contain the current information.  
Understand the self-test diagnostic page  
Use the self-test diagnostic page to:  
•
•
•
View current device information, ink cartridge status, and printhead health status  
Help troubleshoot problems  
Verify installation of optional accessories, such as the duplexer  
The self-test diagnostic page also contains a log of recent events.  
96  
Configure and manage  
     
If you need to call HP, it is often useful to print the self-test diagnostic page before  
calling.  
1. Printer Information: Shows device information (such as the product name, model  
number, serial number, and firmware version number), the accessories that are  
installed (such as the duplexer), and the number of pages printed from the trays  
and accessories.  
2. Ink Cartridge Status: Shows the estimated ink levels (represented in graphical  
form as gauges) and the part numbers and expiration dates of the ink cartridges.  
NOTE: The ink levels shown are an estimate only. Actual ink volumes may  
vary.  
3. Printhead Status: Shows the status of the printhead health and the part numbers,  
first-installation dates, and end-of-warranty dates of the printheads, as well as the  
accumulated ink usage. The status options for the printhead are: good, fair, and  
replace. If the status is 'fair,' then the print quality must be monitored, but the  
printhead does not need to replaced. If the status is 'replace,' then the printhead  
should be replaced, as the device will not function until it is.  
4.  
Event Log: Shows a log of recent events that have occurred.  
To print the Self-Test Diagnostic Page  
•
•
•
Control panel: Press Setup, select Print Report, select Self-Test Report, and  
then press OK.  
Toolbox (Windows): Click the Services tab, and then click Print Self-test  
Diagnostic Page.  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS): Click Device Information from the Information and  
Support panel, and then click Print Configuration Page.  
97  
Understand the self-test diagnostic page  
         
Chapter 9  
Understand the network configuration page  
If the device is connected to a network, you can print a network configuration page to  
view the network settings for the device. You can use the network configuration page  
to help troubleshoot network connectivity problems. If you need to call HP, it is often  
useful to print this page before calling.  
Network Configuration Page  
1. General Information: Shows information about the current status and active  
connection type of the network, and other information, such as the URL of the  
embedded Web server.  
2. 802.3 Wired: Shows information about the active wired network connection, such  
as the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, as well as the hardware address  
of the device.  
3. 802.11 Wireless: Shows information about the active wireless network connection,  
such as the IP address, the communication mode, the network name,  
authentication type, and signal strength.  
4. Bluetooth: Shows information about the active Bluetooth wireless connection,  
such as the device name and address, as well as the passkey.  
5. SNMP: Shows information about the current SNMP settings and status, including  
the community name settings.  
98  
Configure and manage  
   
To print the network configuration page from the control panel  
•
If the device has a two-line display: Press the Setup button, select Network  
Setup, select Print Network Settings, and then press OK.  
•
If the device has a color display: Press the Setup button, select Network, select  
View Network Settings, select Print Network Configuration Page, and then  
press OK.  
Channel range definitions  
The following table lists the 802.11 Wireless channel range definitions.  
The first digit stands for Locale Number  
Locale 0: Channels 1-11:  
high-power 802.11b  
low-power 802.11g  
•
•
Locale 1: Channels 1-13:  
low-power 802.11b  
low-power 802.11g  
•
•
Locale 2: Channels 1-14:  
low-power 802.11b  
low-power 802.11g  
•
•
NOTE: 802.11g is not allowed on channel 14.  
The second digit stands for Ad-Hoc  
Compatibility Mode  
0: Ad-Hoc connection status nominal  
1: Ad-Hoc always appears connected  
The third digit stands for Infrastructure Rate  
Restriction  
0: 802.11b or 802.11g  
1: 802.11b only  
The fourth digit stands for Ad-Hoc Rate  
Restriction  
0: 802.11b or 802.11g  
1: 802.11b only  
Configure network options  
You can manage network settings for the device through the control panel as  
described in the next section. Additional advanced settings are available in the  
embedded Web server, a configuration and status tool you access from your Web  
browser using an existing network connection to the device. For more information, see  
Embedded Web server.  
Change basic network settings  
The control-panel options enable you to set up and manage a wireless connection and  
to perform a variety of network management tasks. This includes viewing the network  
settings, restoring the network defaults, turning the wireless radio on and off, and  
changing the network settings.  
Configure network options  
99  
       
Chapter 9  
Use the Wireless Setup Wizard  
The Wireless Setup Wizard provides an easy way to set up and manage a wireless  
connection to your device. For more information on setting up a wireless connection  
and the Wireless Setup Wizard, see Set up the device for wireless communication  
(some models only).  
View and print network settings  
You can display a summary of the network settings on the control panel, or you can  
print a more detailed network configuration page. The network configuration page lists  
all of the important network settings such as the IP address, link speed, DNS, and  
mDNS. For information on the network settings, see Understand the network  
configuration page.  
1. Press the Setup button.  
2. Press the arrow keys until Network is highlighted, and then press OK.  
3. Do one of the following:  
•
•
•
To display wired (Ethernet) network settings, select View Network Settings,  
and then select Display Wired Summary.  
To display wireless network settings, select View Network Settings, and then  
select Display Wireless Summary.  
To print the network configuration page, select View Network Settings, and  
then select Print Network Configuration Page.  
Turn the wireless radio on and off  
The wireless radio is on by default, as indicated by the blue light on the front of the  
device. In order to stay connected to a wireless network, the radio must stay on.  
However, if your device is connected to a wired network or you have a USB  
connection, the radio is not used. In this case you might want to turn the radio off.  
1. Press the Setup button.  
2. Press the arrow keys until Network is highlighted, and then press OK.  
3. Select Wireless Radio, and then select Yes to turn the radio on, or No to turn the  
radio off.  
Change advanced network settings  
The advanced network settings are provided for your convenience. However, unless  
you are an advanced user, you should not change any of these settings. The  
advanced settings include Link Speed, IP Settings, and Memory Card Security.  
Set link speed  
You can change the speed at which data is transmitted over the network. The default  
is Automatic.  
1. Press the Setup button.  
2. Press the arrow keys until Network is highlighted, then press OK.  
100  
Configure and manage  
                   
3. Select Advanced Setup, then select Link Speed.  
4. Press the number next to the link speed that matches your network hardware:  
•
•
•
•
•
1. Automatic  
2. 10-Full  
3. 10-Half  
4. 100-Full  
5. 100-Half  
To View IP settings  
•
Color display: To view the IP address of the device from the control panel, press  
the Setup button, select Network, select View Network Settings, and then select  
either Display Wired Summary or Display Wireless Summary.  
•
Two-line display: To view the IP address of the device, you must print the network  
configuration page. For more information, see Understand the network  
configuration page.  
To Change IP settings  
The default IP setting for the IP settings is Automatic, which sets the IP settings  
automatically. However, if you are an advanced user, you might want to manually  
change the IP address, subnet mask, or the default gateway.  
CAUTION: Be careful when manually assigning an IP address. If you enter an  
invalid IP address during the installation, your network components will not be able  
to connect with the device.  
1. Press the Setup button.  
2. Press the arrow keys until Network is highlighted, and then press OK.  
3. Select Advanced Setup, select IP Settings, and then select Manual IP Settings.  
4. Press the number next to the IP setting:  
•
•
•
1. IP Address  
2. Subnet Mask  
3. Default Gateway  
5. Enter your changes, and then press OK.  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
After completing all the steps in the getting started guide, use the instructions in this  
section to complete your fax setup. Keep your getting started guide for later use.  
In this section, you will learn how to set up the device so that faxing works successfully  
with equipment and services you might already have on the same phone line.  
TIP: You can also use the Fax Setup Wizard (Windows) or HP Fax Setup Utility  
(Mac OS) to help you quickly set up some important fax settings such as the  
answer mode and fax header information. You can access the Fax Setup Wizard  
(Windows) or HP Fax Setup Utility (Mac OS) through the software you installed  
with the device. After you run the Fax Setup Wizard (Windows) or HP Fax Setup  
Utility (Mac OS), follow the procedures in this section to complete your fax setup.  
101  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
           
Chapter 9  
Set up faxing (parallel phone systems)  
Before you begin setting up the device for faxing, determine which kind of phone  
system your country/region uses. The instructions for fax setup differ depending on  
whether you have a serial- or parallel-type phone system.  
•
If you do not see your country/region listed in the table below, you probably have a  
serial-type phone system. In a serial-type phone system, the connector type on  
your shared telephone equipment (modems, phones, and answering machines)  
does not allow a physical connection to the "2-EXT" port on the device. Instead, all  
equipment must be connected at the telephone wall jack.  
NOTE: In some countries/regions that use serial-type phone systems, the  
phone cord that came with the device might have an additional wall plug  
attached to it. This enables you to connect other telecom devices to the wall  
jack where you plug in the device.  
•
If your country/region is listed in the table below, you probably have a parallel-type  
telephone system. In a parallel-type phone system, you are able to connect shared  
telephone equipment to the phone line by using the "2-EXT" port on the back of  
the device.  
NOTE: If you have a parallel-type phone system, HP recommends you use  
the 2-wire phone cord supplied with the device to connect it to the telephone  
wall jack.  
Table 9-1 Countries/regions with a parallel-type phone system  
Argentina  
Canada  
Colombia  
Indonesia  
Korea  
Australia  
Chile  
Brazil  
China  
Greece  
Ireland  
India  
Japan  
Latin America  
Philippines  
Russia  
Malaysia  
Poland  
Saudi Arabia  
Taiwan  
Venezuela  
Mexico  
Portugal  
Singapore  
Thailand  
Vietnam  
Spain  
USA  
If you are unsure which kind of telephone system you have (serial or parallel), check  
with your telephone company.  
Choose the correct fax setup for your home or office  
To fax successfully, you need to know what types of equipment and services (if any)  
share the same phone line with the device. This is important because you might need  
102  
Configure and manage  
       
to connect some of your existing office equipment directly to the device, and you might  
also need to change some fax settings before you can fax successfully.  
To determine the best way to set up the device in your home or office, first read  
through the questions in this section and record your answers. Next, refer to the table  
in the following section and choose the recommended setup case based on your  
answers.  
Make sure to read and answer the following questions in the order they are presented.  
1. Do you have a digital subscriber line (DSL) service through your telephone  
company? (DSL might be called ADSL in your country/region.)  
If you answered Yes, proceed directly to Case B: Set up the device with DSL. You  
do not need to continue answering questions.  
If you answered No, continue answering questions.  
2. Do you have a private branch exchange (PBX) phone system or an integrated  
services digital network (ISDN) system?  
If you answered Yes, proceed directly to Case C: Set up the device with a PBX  
phone system or an ISDN line. You do not need to continue answering questions.  
If you answered No, continue answering questions.  
3. Do you subscribe to a distinctive ring service through your telephone company that  
provides multiple phone numbers with different ring patterns?  
If you answered Yes, proceed directly to Case D: Fax with a distinctive ring service  
on the same line. You do not need to continue answering questions.  
If you answered No, continue answering questions.  
Are you unsure if you have distinctive ring? Many phone companies offer a  
distinctive ring feature that allows you to have several phone numbers on one  
phone line.  
When you subscribe to this service, each phone number will have a different ring  
pattern. For example, you can have single, double, and triple rings for the different  
numbers. You might assign one phone number with a single ring to your voice  
calls, and another phone number with double rings to your fax calls. This allows  
you to tell the difference between voice and fax calls when the phone rings.  
4. Do you receive voice calls at the same phone number you will use for fax calls on  
the device?  
Continue answering questions.  
5. Do you have a computer dial-up modem on the same phone line as the device?  
Are you unsure if you use a computer dial-up modem? If you answer Yes to any of  
the following questions, you are using a computer dial-up modem:  
•
•
•
Do you send and receive faxes directly to and from your computer software  
applications through a dial-up connection?  
Do you send and receive e-mail messages on your computer through a dial-up  
connection?  
Do you access the Internet from your computer through a dial-up connection?  
Continue answering questions.  
103  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
Chapter 9  
6. Do you have an answering machine that answers voice calls at the same phone  
number you will use for fax calls on the device?  
Continue answering questions.  
7. Do you subscribe to a voice mail service through your telephone company at the  
same phone number you will use for fax calls on the device?  
After you have completed answering the questions, proceed to the next section to  
select your fax setup case.  
Select your fax setup case  
Now that you have answered all the questions about the equipment and services that  
share the phone line with the device, you are ready to choose the best setup case for  
your home or office.  
From the first column in the following table, choose the combination of equipment and  
services applicable to your home or office setting. Then look up the appropriate setup  
case in the second or third column based on your phone system. Step-by-step  
instructions are included for each case in the sections that follow.  
If you have answered all the questions in the previous section and have none of the  
described equipment or services, choose "None" from the first column in the table.  
NOTE: If your home or office setup is not described in this section, set up the  
device as you would a regular analog phone. Make sure you use the phone cord  
supplied in the box to connect one end to your telephone wall jack and the other  
end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the back of the device. If you use another phone  
cord, you might experience problems sending and receiving faxes.  
Other equipment/services  
sharing your fax line  
Recommended fax setup  
for parallel-type phone  
systems  
Recommended fax setup  
for serial-type phone  
systems  
None  
Case A: Separate fax line (no Refer to your country in  
voice calls received)  
Serial-type fax setup  
(You answered No to all  
questions.)  
DSL service  
Case B: Set up the device  
with DSL  
Refer to your country in  
Serial-type fax setup  
(You answered Yes to  
question 1 only.)  
PBX or ISDN system  
Case C: Set up the device  
with a PBX phone system or  
an ISDN line  
Refer to your country in  
Serial-type fax setup  
(You answered Yes to  
question 2 only.)  
Distinctive ring service  
Case D: Fax with a distinctive Refer to your country in  
ring service on the same line Serial-type fax setup  
(You answered Yes to  
question 3 only.)  
Voice calls  
Case E: Shared voice/fax line Refer to your country in  
Serial-type fax setup  
(You answered Yes to  
question 4 only.)  
Voice calls and voice mail  
service  
Case F: Shared voice/fax line Refer to your country in  
with voice mail  
Serial-type fax setup  
104  
Configure and manage  
 
(continued)  
Other equipment/services  
sharing your fax line  
Recommended fax setup  
for parallel-type phone  
systems  
Recommended fax setup  
for serial-type phone  
systems  
(You answered Yes to  
questions 4 and 7 only.)  
Computer dial-up modem  
Case G: Fax line shared with  
computer modem (no voice  
calls received)  
Not applicable.  
(You answered Yes to  
question 5 only.)  
Voice calls and computer dial- Case H: Shared voice/fax line Not applicable.  
up modem  
with computer modem  
(You answered Yes to  
questions 4 and 5 only.)  
Voice calls and answering  
machine  
Case I: Shared voice/fax line  
with answering machine  
Not applicable.  
Not applicable.  
(You answered Yes to  
questions 4 and 6 only.)  
Voice calls, computer dial-up  
modem, and answering  
machine  
Case J: Shared voice/fax line  
with computer modem and  
answering machine  
(You answered Yes to  
questions 4, 5, and 6 only.)  
Voice calls, computer dial-up  
Case K: Shared voice/fax line Not applicable.  
modem, and voice mail service with computer dial-up modem  
and voice mail  
(You answered Yes to  
questions 4, 5, and 7 only.)  
Case A: Separate fax line (no voice calls received)  
If you have a separate phone line on which you receive no voice calls, and you have  
no other equipment connected on this phone line, set up the device as described in  
this section.  
Figure 9-1 Back view of the device  
105  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
   
Chapter 9  
1
2
Telephone wall jack  
Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to connect to  
the 1-LINE port  
To set up the device with a separate fax line  
1. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to your  
telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the  
back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the telephone wall  
jack to the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special  
phone cord is different from the phone cords you might already have in your  
home or office.  
2. Turn on the Auto Answer setting.  
3. (Optional) Change the Rings to Answer setting to the lowest setting (two rings).  
4. Run a fax test.  
When the phone rings, the device answers automatically after the number of rings you  
set in the Rings to Answer setting. The device begins emitting fax reception tones to  
the sending fax machine and receives the fax.  
Case B: Set up the device with DSL  
If you have a DSL service through your telephone company, and do not connect any  
equipment to the device, use the instructions in this section to connect a DSL filter  
between the telephone wall jack and the device. The DSL filter removes the digital  
signal that can interfere with the device, so the device can communicate properly with  
the phone line. (DSL might be called ADSL in your country/region.)  
NOTE: If you have a DSL line and you do not connect the DSL filter, you will not  
be able to send and receive faxes with the device.  
Figure 9-2 Back view of the device  
1
2
Telephone wall jack  
DSL (or ADSL) filter and cord supplied by your DSL provider  
106  
Configure and manage  
   
(continued)  
3
Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to connect to  
the 1-LINE port  
To set up the device with DSL  
1. Obtain a DSL filter from your DSL provider.  
2. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to the  
open port on the DSL filter, and then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-  
LINE on the back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the DSL filter to  
the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special phone cord  
is different from the phone cords you might already have in your home or office.  
As only one phone cord is supplied, you may will need to obtain additional  
phone cords for this setup.  
3. Connect an additional phone cord from the DSL filter to the telephone wall jack.  
4. Run a fax test.  
Case C: Set up the device with a PBX phone system or an ISDN line  
If you are using either a PBX phone system or an ISDN converter/terminal adapter,  
make sure you do the following:  
•
If you are using either a PBX or an ISDN converter/terminal adaptor, connect the  
device to the port that is designated for fax and phone use. Also, make sure that  
the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your country/region, if  
possible.  
NOTE: Some ISDN systems allow you to configure the ports for specific  
phone equipment. For example, you might have assigned one port for  
telephone and Group 3 fax and another port for multiple purposes. If you have  
problems when connected to the fax/phone port of your ISDN converter, try  
using the port designated for multiple purposes; it might be labeled "multi-  
combi" or something similar.  
•
If you are using a PBX phone system, set the call waiting tone to "off."  
NOTE: Many digital PBX systems include a call-waiting tone that is set to "on"  
by default. The call waiting tone will interfere with any fax transmission, and  
you will not be able to send or receive faxes with the device. Refer to the  
documentation that came with your PBX phone system for instructions on how  
to turn off the call-waiting tone.  
•
•
If you are using a PBX phone system, dial the number for an outside line before  
dialing the fax number.  
Make sure you use the supplied cord to connect from the telephone wall jack to  
the device. If you do not, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special  
phone cord is different from the phone cords you might already have in your home  
or office. If the supplied phone cord is too short, you can purchase a coupler from  
your local electronics store and extend it.  
107  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
   
Chapter 9  
Case D: Fax with a distinctive ring service on the same line  
If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service (through your telephone company) that  
allows you to have multiple phone numbers on one phone line, each with a different  
ring pattern, set up the device as described in this section.  
Figure 9-3 Back view of the device  
1
2
Telephone wall jack  
Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to connect to  
the 1-LINE port  
To set up the device with a distinctive ring service  
1. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to your  
telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the  
back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the telephone wall  
jack to the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special  
phone cord is different from the phone cords you might already have in your  
home or office.  
2. Turn on the Auto Answer setting.  
3. Change the Distinctive Ring setting to match the pattern that the telephone  
company assigned to your fax number.  
NOTE: By default, the device is set to answer all ring patterns. If you do not  
set the Distinctive Ring to match the ring pattern assigned to your fax  
number, the device might answer both voice calls and fax calls or it might not  
answer at all.  
4. (Optional) Change the Rings to Answer setting to the lowest setting (two rings).  
5. Run a fax test.  
The device automatically answers incoming calls that have the ring pattern you  
selected (Distinctive Ring setting) after the number of rings you selected (Rings to  
Answer setting). The device begins emitting fax reception tones to the sending fax  
machine and receives the fax.  
108  
Configure and manage  
   
Case E: Shared voice/fax line  
If you receive both voice calls and fax calls at the same phone number, and you have  
no other office equipment (or voice mail) on this phone line, set up the device as  
described in this section.  
Figure 9-4 Back view of the device  
1
2
Telephone wall jack  
Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to connect to  
the 1-LINE port  
3
Telephone (optional)  
To set up the device with a shared voice/fax line  
1. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to your  
telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the  
back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the telephone wall  
jack to the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special  
phone cord is different from the phone cords you might already have in your  
home or office.  
2. Do one of the following:  
•
If you have a parallel-type phone system, remove the white plug from the port  
labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device, and then connect a phone to this port.  
•
If you have a serial-type phone system, you might plug your phone directly on  
top of the device cable which has a wall plug attached to it.  
109  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
   
Chapter 9  
3. Now you need to decide how you want the device to answer calls, automatically or  
manually:  
•
If you set up the device to answer calls automatically, it answers all incoming  
calls and receives faxes. The device will not be able to distinguish between fax  
and voice calls in this case; if you suspect the call is a voice call, you will need  
to answer it before the device answers the call. To set up the device to answer  
calls automatically, turn on the Auto Answer setting.  
•
If you set up the device to answer faxes manually, you must be available to  
respond in person to incoming fax calls or the device cannot receive faxes. To  
set up the device to answer calls manually, turn off the Auto Answer setting.  
4. Run a fax test.  
If you pick up the phone before the device answers the call and hear fax tones from a  
sending fax machine, you will need to answer the fax call manually.  
Case F: Shared voice/fax line with voice mail  
If you receive both voice calls and fax calls at the same phone number, and you also  
subscribe to a voice mail service through your telephone company, set up the device  
as described in this section.  
NOTE: You cannot receive faxes automatically if you have a voice mail service at  
the same phone number you use for fax calls. You must receive faxes manually;  
this means you must be available to respond in person to incoming fax calls. If you  
want to receive faxes automatically instead, contact your telephone company to  
subscribe to a distinctive ring service, or to obtain a separate phone line for faxing.  
Figure 9-5 Back view of the device  
1
2
Telephone wall jack  
Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to connect to  
the "1-LINE" port  
110  
Configure and manage  
   
To set up the device with voice mail  
1. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to your  
telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the  
back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the telephone wall  
jack to the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special  
phone cord is different from the phone cords you might already have in your  
home or office.  
2. Turn off the Auto Answer setting.  
3. Run a fax test.  
You must be available to respond in person to incoming fax calls, or the device cannot  
receive faxes.  
Case G: Fax line shared with computer modem (no voice calls received)  
If you have a fax line on which you receive no voice calls, and you also have a  
computer modem connected on this line, set up the device as described in this section.  
NOTE: If you have a computer dial-up modem, your computer dial-up modem  
shares the phone line with the device. You will not be able to use both your modem  
and the device simultaneously. For example, you cannot use the device for faxing  
while you are using your computer dial-up modem to send an e-mail or access the  
Internet.  
•
•
Set up the device with a computer dial-up modem  
Set up the device with a computer DSL/ADSL modem  
Set up the device with a computer dial-up modem  
If you are using the same phone line for sending faxes and for a computer dial-up  
modem, follow these directions for setting up the device.  
Figure 9-6 Back view of the device  
111  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
     
Chapter 9  
1
2
Telephone wall jack  
Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to connect to  
the "1-LINE" port  
3
Computer with modem  
To set up the device with a computer dial-up modem  
1. Remove the white plug from the port labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device.  
2. Find the phone cord that connects from the back of your computer (your computer  
dial-up modem) to a telephone wall jack. Disconnect the cord from the telephone  
wall jack and plug it into the port labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device.  
3. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to your  
telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the  
back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the telephone wall  
jack to the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special  
phone cord is different from the phone cords you might already have in your  
home or office.  
4. If your modem software is set to receive faxes to your computer automatically, turn  
off that setting.  
NOTE: If you do not turn off the automatic fax reception setting in your  
modem software, the device will not be able to receive faxes.  
5. Turn on the Auto Answer setting.  
6. (Optional) Change the Rings to Answer setting to the lowest setting (two rings).  
7. Run a fax test.  
When the phone rings, the device automatically answers after the number of rings you  
set in the Rings to Answer setting. The device begins emitting fax reception tones to  
the sending fax machine and receives the fax.  
Set up the device with a computer DSL/ADSL modem  
If you have a DSL line and use that phone line to send faxes, follow these instructions  
to set up your fax.  
112  
Configure and manage  
 
1
2
3
Telephone wall jack  
Parallel splitter  
DSL/ADSL splitter  
Connect one end of the phone jack that was supplied with the device  
to connect to the 1-LINE port on the back of the device. Connect the  
other end of the cord to the DSL/ADSL filter.  
4
5
Computer  
Computer DSL/ADSL modem  
NOTE: You will need to purchase a parallel splitter (also called a coupler). A  
parallel splitter has one RJ-11 port on the front and two RJ-11 ports on the back.  
Do not use a 2–line phone splitter, a serial splitter, or a parallel splitter which has  
two RJ-11 ports on the front and a plug on the back.  
To set up the device with a computer DSL/ADSL modem  
1. Obtain a DSL filter from your DSL provider.  
2. Using the phone cord provided in the box with the device, connect one end to the  
DSL filter, and then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the back  
of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the DSL filter to  
the back of the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special  
phone cord is different from the phone cords you might already have in your  
home or office.  
3. Connect the DSL filter to the parallel splitter.  
4. Connect the DSL modem to the parallel splitter.  
5. Connect the parallel splitter to the wall jack.  
6. Run a fax test.  
When the phone rings, the device automatically answers after the number of rings you  
set in the Rings to Answer setting. The device begins emitting fax reception tones to  
the sending fax machine and receives the fax.  
Case H: Shared voice/fax line with computer modem  
If you receive both voice calls and fax calls at the same phone number, and you also  
have a computer modem connected on this phone line, set up the device as described  
in this section.  
113  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
   
Chapter 9  
NOTE: Since your computer modem shares the phone line with the device, you  
cannot use both your modem and the device simultaneously. For example, you  
cannot use the device for faxing while you are using your computer modem to  
send an e-mail or access the Internet.  
•
•
Shared voice/fax with computer dial-up modem  
Shared voice/fax with computer DSL/ADSL modem  
Shared voice/fax with computer dial-up modem  
If you use your phone line for both fax and telephone calls, use these instructions to  
set up your fax.  
There are two different ways to set up the device with your computer based on the  
number of phone ports on your computer. Before you begin, check your computer to  
see if it has one or two phone ports.  
•
If your computer has only one phone port, you will need to purchase a parallel  
splitter (also called a coupler), as shown below. (A parallel splitter has one RJ-11  
port on the front and two RJ-11 ports on the back. Do not use a two-line phone  
splitter, a serial splitter, or a parallel splitter which has two RJ-11 ports on the front  
and a plug on the back.)  
Figure 9-7 Example of a parallel splitter  
•
If your computer has one phone port, set up the device as described below.  
Figure 9-8 Back view of the device  
1
2
Telephone wall jack  
Phone cord provided with the device plugged into the 1-LINE port on  
the back of the device  
3
Parallel splitter  
114  
Configure and manage  
 
4
5
Computer  
Telephone  
To set up the device on the same phone line as a computer with one phone port  
1. Remove the white plug from the port labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device.  
2. Find the phone cord that connects from the back of your computer (your computer  
dial-up modem) to a telephone wall jack. Disconnect the cord from the telephone  
wall jack and plug it into the parallel splitter.  
3. Connect a phone cord from the parallel splitter to the port labeled 2-EXT on the  
back of the device.  
4. Connect a phone to the parallel splitter.  
5. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to your  
telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the  
back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the telephone wall  
jack to the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special  
phone cord is different from the phone cords you might already have in your  
home or office.  
6. If your modem software is set to receive faxes to your computer automatically, turn  
off that setting.  
NOTE: If you do not turn off the automatic fax reception setting in your  
modem software, the device will not be able to receive faxes.  
7. Now you need to decide how you want the device to answer calls, automatically or  
manually:  
•
If you set up the device to answer calls automatically, it answers all incoming  
calls and receives faxes. The device will not be able to distinguish between fax  
and voice calls in this case; if you suspect the call is a voice call, you will need  
to answer it before the device answers the call. To set up the device to answer  
calls automatically, turn on the Auto Answer setting.  
•
If you set up the device to answer faxes manually, you must be available to  
respond in person to incoming fax calls or the device cannot receive faxes. To  
set up the device to answer calls manually, turn off the Auto Answer setting.  
8. Run a fax test.  
NOTE: If your computer has two telephone ports on the back, you do not need to  
use a parallel splitter. You can plug the telephone into the “OUT” port on the  
computer dial-up modem.  
If you pick up the phone before the device answers the call and hear fax tones from a  
sending fax machine, you will need to answer the fax call manually.  
If you use your phone line for voice, fax, and your computer dial-up modem, follow  
these directions to set up your fax.  
115  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
Chapter 9  
Shared voice/fax with computer DSL/ADSL modem  
Use these instructions if your computer has a DSL/ADSL modem  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Telephone wall jack  
Parallel splitter  
DSL/ADSL filter  
Phone cord supplied with the device  
DSL/ADSL modem  
Computer  
Telephone  
NOTE: You will need to purchase a parallel splitter (also called a coupler). A  
parallel splitter has one RJ-11 port on the front and two RJ-11 ports on the back.  
Do not use a 2–line phone splitter, a serial splitter, or a parallel splitter which has  
two RJ-11 ports on the front and a plug on the back.  
116  
Configure and manage  
 
To set up the device with a computer DSL/ADSL modem  
1. Obtain a DSL filter from your DSL provider.  
NOTE: Phones in other parts of the home/office sharing the same phone  
number with DSL service will need to be connected to additional DSL filters,  
otherwise you will experience noise when making voice calls.  
2. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the devices, connect one end to the  
DSL filter, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the back of the  
device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the DSL filter to  
the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special phone cord  
is different from phone cords you might already have in your home or office.  
3. If you have a parallel-type phone system, remove the white plug from the port  
labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device, and then connect a phone to this port.  
4. Connect the DSL filter to the parallel splitter.  
5. Connect the DSL modem to the parallel splitter.  
6. Connect the parallel splitter to the wall jack.  
7. Run a fax test.  
When the phone rings, the device automatically answers after the number of rings you  
set in the Rings to Answer setting. The device begins emitting fax reception tones to  
the sending fax machine and receives the fax.  
Case I: Shared voice/fax line with answering machine  
If you receive both voice calls and fax calls at the same phone number, and you also  
have an answering machine that answers voice calls at this phone number, set up the  
device as described in this section.  
Figure 9-9 Back view of the device  
1
2
Telephone wall jack  
Use the phone cord provided to connect to the 1-LINE port on the back of  
the device  
3
4
Answering machine  
Telephone (optional)  
117  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
   
Chapter 9  
To set up the device with a shared voice/fax line with answering machine  
1. Remove the white plug from the port labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device.  
2. Unplug your answering machine from the telephone wall jack, and connect it to the  
port labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not connect your answering machine directly to the device,  
fax tones from a sending fax machine might be recorded on your answering  
machine, and you probably will not be able to receive faxes with the device.  
3. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to your  
telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the  
back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the telephone wall  
jack to the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special  
phone cord is different from the phone cords you might already have in your  
home or office.  
4. (Optional) If your answering machine does not have a built-in phone, for  
convenience you might want to connect a phone to the back of your answering  
machine at the "OUT" port.  
NOTE: If your answering machine does not let you connect an external  
phone, you can purchase and use a parallel splitter (also known as a coupler)  
to connect both the answering machine and telephone to the device. You can  
use standard phone cords for these connections.  
5. Turn on the Auto Answer setting.  
6. Set your answering machine to answer after a low number of rings.  
7. Change the Rings to Answer setting on the device to the maximum number of  
rings supported by your device. (The maximum number of rings varies by country/  
region.)  
8. Run a fax test.  
When the phone rings, your answering machine answers after the number of rings you  
have set, and then plays your recorded greeting. The device monitors the call during  
this time, "listening" for fax tones. If incoming fax tones are detected, the device emits  
fax reception tones and receives the fax; if there are no fax tones, the device stops  
monitoring the line and your answering machine can record a voice message.  
Case J: Shared voice/fax line with computer modem and answering machine  
If you receive both voice calls and fax calls at the same phone number, and you also  
have a computer modem and answering machine connected on this phone line, set up  
the device as described in this section.  
118  
Configure and manage  
   
NOTE: Since your computer dial-up modem shares the phone line with the  
device, you cannot use both your modem and the device simultaneously. For  
example, you cannot use the device for faxing while you are using your computer  
dial-up modem to send an e-mail or access the Internet.  
•
•
Shared voice/fax line with computer dial-up modem and answering machine  
Shared voice/fax line with computer DSL/ADSL modem and answering machine  
Shared voice/fax line with computer dial-up modem and answering machine  
There are two different ways to set the device with your computer based on the  
number of phone ports on your computer. Before you begin, check your computer to  
see if it has one or two phone ports.  
•
If your computer has only one phone port, you will need to purchase a parallel  
splitter (also called a coupler), as shown below. (A parallel splitter has one RJ-11  
port on the front and two RJ-11 ports on the back. Do not use a two-line phone  
splitter, a serial splitter, or a parallel splitter which has two RJ-11 ports on the front  
and a plug on the back.)  
Figure 9-10 Example of a parallel splitter  
•
If your computer has one phone port, set up the device as described below.  
Figure 9-11 Back view of the device  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Telephone wall jack  
Telephone cord connected to the parallel splitter  
Parallel splitter  
Telephone (optional)  
Answering machine  
Computer with modem  
119  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
 
Chapter 9  
7
Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to connect to  
the "1-LINE" port  
To set up the device on the same phone line as a computer with one phone port  
1. Remove the white plug from the port labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device.  
2. Find the phone cord that connects from the back of your computer (your computer  
dial-up modem) to a telephone wall jack. Disconnect the cord from the telephone  
wall jack and plug it into the port labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device.  
3. Unplug your answering machine from the telephone wall jack, and connect it to the  
port labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not connect your answering machine directly to the device,  
fax tones from a sending fax machine might be recorded on your answering  
machine, and you probably will not be able to receive faxes with the device.  
4. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to your  
telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the  
back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the telephone wall  
jack to the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special  
phone cord is different from the phone cords you might already have in your  
home or office.  
5. (Optional) If your answering machine does not have a built-in phone, for  
convenience you might want to connect a phone to the back of your answering  
machine at the "OUT" port.  
NOTE: If your answering machine does not let you connect an external  
phone, you can purchase and use a parallel splitter (also known as a coupler)  
to connect both the answering machine and telephone to the device. You can  
use standard phone cords for these connections.  
6. If your modem software is set to receive faxes to your computer automatically, turn  
off that setting.  
NOTE: If you do not turn off the automatic fax reception setting in your  
modem software, the device will not be able to receive faxes.  
7. Turn on the Auto Answer setting.  
8. Set your answering machine to answer after a low number of rings.  
9. Change the Rings to Answer setting on the device to the maximum number of  
rings supported by your device. (The maximum number of rings varies by country/  
region.)  
10. Run a fax test.  
NOTE: If you are using a computer with two telephone ports, you do not need  
a parallel splitter. You can plug the answering machine into the “OUT” port on  
the back of the computer.  
120  
Configure and manage  
When the phone rings, your answering machine answers after the number of rings you  
have set, and then plays your recorded greeting. The device monitors the call during  
this time, "listening" for fax tones. If incoming fax tones are detected, the device emits  
fax reception tones and receives the fax; if there are no fax tones, the device stops  
monitoring the line and your answering machine can record a voice message.  
Shared voice/fax line with computer DSL/ADSL modem and answering machine  
1
2
3
4
Telephone wall jack  
Parallel splitter  
DSL/ADSL filter  
Phone cord provided with the device connected to the 1-LINE port on  
the back of the device  
5
6
7
8
DSL/ADSL modem  
Computer  
Answering machine  
Telephone (optional)  
NOTE: You will need to purchase a parallel splitter (also called a coupler). A  
parallel splitter has one RJ-11 port on the front and two RJ-11 ports on the back.  
Do not use a 2–line phone splitter, a serial splitter, or a parallel splitter which has  
two RJ-11 ports on the front and a plug on the back.  
121  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
 
Chapter 9  
To set up the device with a computer DSL/ADSL modem  
1. Obtain a DSL/ADSL filter from your DSL/ADSL provider.  
NOTE: Phones in other parts of the home/office sharing the same phone  
number with DSL/ADSL service will need to be connected to additional DSL/  
ADSL filters, otherwise you will experience noise when making voice calls.  
2. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to the  
DSL/ADSL filter, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the back  
of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the DSL/ADSL  
filter to the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special  
phone cord is different from the phone cords you might already have in your  
home or office.  
3. Connect the DSL/ADSL filter to the splitter.  
4. Unplug the answering machine from the telephone wall jack, and connect it to the  
port labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not connect your answering machine directly to the device,  
fax tones from a sending fax machine might be recorded on your answering  
machine, and you probably will not be able to receive faxes with the device.  
5. Connect the DSL modem to the parallel splitter.  
6. Connect the parallel splitter to the wall jack.  
7. Set your answering machine to answer after a low number of rings.  
8. Change your Rings to Answer setting on the device to the maximum number of  
rings supported by the device.  
NOTE: The maximum number of rings varies by country/region  
9. Run a fax test.  
When the phone rings, your answering machine will answer after the number of rings  
you have set, and then play your recorded greeting. The device monitors the call  
during this time, “listening” for fax tones. If incoming fax tones are detected, the device  
will emit fax reception tones and receive the fax; if there are no fax tones, the device  
stops monitoring the line and your answering machine can record a voice message.  
If you use the same phone line for telephone, fax, and have a computer DSL modem,  
follow these instructions to set up your fax.  
Case K: Shared voice/fax line with computer dial-up modem and voice mail  
If you receive both voice calls and fax calls at the same phone number, use a  
computer dial-up modem on the same phone line, and subscribe to a voice mail  
service through your telephone company, set up the device as described in this section.  
122  
Configure and manage  
   
NOTE: You cannot receive faxes automatically if you have a voice mail service at  
the same phone number you use for fax calls. You must receive faxes manually;  
this means you must be available to respond in person to incoming fax calls. If you  
want to receive faxes automatically instead, contact your telephone company to  
subscribe to a distinctive ring service, or to obtain a separate phone line for faxing.  
Since your computer dial-up modem shares the phone line with the device, you cannot  
use both your modem and the device simultaneously. For example, you cannot use  
the device for faxing if you are using your computer dial-up modem to send an e-mail  
or access the Internet.  
There are two different ways to set up the device with your computer based on the  
number of phone ports on your computer. Before you begin, check your computer to  
see if it has one or two phone ports.  
•
If your computer has only one phone port, you will need to purchase a parallel  
splitter (also called a coupler), as shown below. (A parallel splitter has one RJ-11  
port on the front and two RJ-11 ports on the back. Do not use a two-line phone  
splitter, a serial splitter, or a parallel splitter which has two RJ-11 ports on the front  
and a plug on the back.)  
Figure 9-12 Example of a parallel splitter  
•
If your computer has two phone ports, set up the device as described below.  
Figure 9-13 Back view of the device  
1
2
Telephone wall jack  
Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to connect to  
the 1-LINE port  
3
4
Computer with modem  
Telephone  
123  
Set up faxing for the device (some models only)  
Chapter 9  
To set up the device on the same phone line as a computer with two phone ports  
1. Remove the white plug from the port labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device.  
2. Find the phone cord that connects from the back of your computer (your computer  
dial-up modem) to a telephone wall jack. Disconnect the cord from the telephone  
wall jack and plug it into the port labeled 2-EXT on the back of the device.  
3. Connect a phone to the "OUT" port on the back of your computer dial-up modem.  
4. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to your  
telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the  
back of the device.  
NOTE: If you do not use the supplied cord to connect from the telephone wall  
jack to the device, you might not be able to fax successfully. This special  
phone cord is different from the phone cords you might already have in your  
home or office.  
5. If your modem software is set to receive faxes to your computer automatically, turn  
off that setting.  
NOTE: If you do not turn off the automatic fax reception setting in your  
modem software, the device will not be able to receive faxes.  
6. Turn off the Auto Answer setting.  
7. Run a fax test.  
You must be available to respond in person to incoming fax calls, or the device cannot  
receive faxes.  
Serial-type fax setup  
For information on setting up the device for faxing using a serial-type phone system,  
see the Fax Configuration Web site for your country/region.  
Austria  
www.hp.com/at/faxconfig  
Germany  
www.hp.com/de/faxconfig  
www.hp.com/ch/fr/faxconfig  
www.hp.com/ch/de/faxconfig  
www.hp.com/uk/faxconfig  
www.hp.fi/faxconfig  
Switzerland (French)  
Switzerland (German)  
United Kingdom  
Finland  
Denmark  
www.hp.dk/faxconfig  
Sweden  
www.hp.se/faxconfig  
Norway  
www.hp.no/faxconfig  
Netherlands  
Belgium (Dutch)  
Belguim (French)  
Portugal  
www.hp.nl/faxconfig  
www.hp.be/nl/faxconfig  
www.hp.be/fr/faxconfig  
www.hp.pt/faxconfig  
124  
Configure and manage  
 
(continued)  
Spain  
www.hp.es/faxconfig  
France  
Ireland  
Italy  
www.hp.com/fr/faxconfig  
www.hp.com/ie/faxconfig  
www.hp.com/it/faxconfig  
Configure the device (Windows)  
You can connect the device directly to a computer, or you can share the device among  
other users on a network.  
NOTE: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 must be installed on the computer system  
to run the installation program.  
Also, you must have administrator privileges to install a printer driver on Windows  
2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003.  
When setting up the device, HP recommends that you connect it after you install the  
software because the installation program is designed to provide you with the easiest  
setup experience. However, if you have connected the cable first, see To connect the  
device before installing the software.  
Direct connection  
You can connect the device directly to your computer using a USB cable.  
NOTE: If you install the device software and connect the device to a computer  
running Windows, you can connect additional devices to the same computer with  
USB cables without reinstalling the device software.  
When setting up the device, HP recommends that you connect the device after you  
install the software because the installation program is designed to provide you with  
the easiest setup experience. However, if you have connected the cable first, see To  
connect the device before installing the software.  
To install the software before connecting the device (recommended)  
1. Close any applications that are running.  
2. Insert the Starter CD into the CD drive. The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD  
menu does not start automatically, double-click the setup icon on the Starter CD..  
3. On the CD menu, click Install and follow the onscreen instructions.  
4. When prompted, turn on the device and connect it to the computer using a USB  
cable. The Found New Hardware wizard appears on the computer screen, and  
the device icon is created in the Printers folder.  
NOTE: You may connect the USB cable at a later time when you need to use the  
device.  
You can also share the device with other computers using a simple form of  
networking known as locally shared networking. For more information, see To  
share the device on a locally shared network.  
125  
Configure the device (Windows)  
         
Chapter 9  
To connect the device before installing the software  
If you connected the device to the computer before installing the device software, the  
Found New Hardware wizard displays on the computer screen.  
NOTE: If you turned on the device, do not turn it off or unplug the cable from the  
device while the installation program is running. If you do so, the installation  
program will not finish.  
1. In the Found New Hardware dialog box that displays methods for locating the  
printer driver, select the Advanced option, and then click Next.  
NOTE: Do not allow the Found New Hardware wizard to perform an  
automatic search for the printer driver.  
2. Select the check box for specifying the driver location, and ensure that the other  
check boxes are clear.  
3. Insert the Starter CD into the CD drive. If the CD menu appears, close it.  
4. Browse to locate the root directory on the Starter CD (for example, D), and then  
click OK.  
5. Click Next and follow the onscreen instructions.  
6. Click Finish to close the Found New Hardware wizard. The wizard automatically  
starts the installation program (this might take a short while).  
7. Complete the installation process.  
NOTE: You can also share the device with other computers using a simple form  
of networking known as locally shared networking. For more information, see To  
share the device on a locally shared network.  
To share the device on a locally shared network  
In a locally shared network, the device is connected directly to the USB connector of a  
selected computer (known as the server) and is shared by other computers (clients).  
NOTE: When sharing a directly connected device, use the computer with the  
newest operating system as the server. For example, if you have a computer  
running Windows XP and another computer running an older version of Windows,  
use the computer running Windows XP as the server.  
Use this configuration only in small groups or when usage is low. The connected  
computer is slowed down when many users print to the device.  
Only the printing function is shared. Scan, Copy, and Fax functions are not shared.  
1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes.  
- Or -  
Click Start, click Control Panel, and then double-click Printers.  
2. Right-click the device icon, click Properties, and then click the Sharing tab.  
3. Click the option to share the device, and give it a share name.  
4. To share the device with client computers that use other versions of Windows,  
click Additional Drivers to install those drivers as a convenience to the users. You  
must have the Starter CD in your CD drive.  
126  
Configure and manage  
     
Network connection  
If the device has network capability, it can be shared in a network environment by  
connecting it directly to the network. This type of connection offers the ability to  
manage the device using the embedded Web server from any computer on the  
network.  
NOTE: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 must be installed on the computer system  
to run the installation program.  
Choose the installation option for the type of network you have:  
•
Client/server network: If your network has a computer acting as a dedicated print  
server, install the device software on the server, and then install the device  
software on the client computers. For more information see To install the device on  
a network and To install the device software on client computers. This method  
does not allow you to share the full functionality of the device. Client computers  
can only print from the device.  
•
Peer-to-peer network: If you have a peer-to-peer network (a network without a  
dedicated print server), install the software on the computers that will be using the  
device. For more information, see To install the device on a network.  
In addition, you can connect to a network printer on both types of networks using the  
Add Printer wizard in Windows. For more information, see To install the printer driver  
using Add Printer.  
To install the device on a network  
Use the following steps to install the device software in the following networking  
scenarios:  
You have a peer-to-peer network (a network without a dedicated print server)  
1. Remove the protective cover from the device's network port and connect the  
device to the network.  
2. Close any third-party firewall and any applications that are running on the  
computer system that are acting as the print server.  
3. Insert the Starter CD into the CD drive. The CD menu starts automatically. If the  
CD menu does not start automatically, browse to the CD drive of the computer and  
double-click Setup.exe.  
4. On the CD menu, click Install, and then follow the onscreen instructions.  
5. On the Connection Type screen, select Wired network/Wireless, and then click  
Next.  
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation.  
NOTE: To share the device with Windows client computers, see To install the  
device software on client computers and To share the device on a locally shared  
network.  
To install the device software on client computers  
After printer drivers are installed on the computer that is acting as the print server, the  
printing functionality can be shared. Individual Windows users who want to use the  
network device must install the software on their computers (clients).  
127  
Configure the device (Windows)  
       
Chapter 9  
A client computer can connect to the device in the following ways:  
•
In the Printers folder, double-click the Add Printer icon and follow the instructions  
for a network installation. For more information, see To install the printer driver  
using Add Printer.  
•
•
On the network, browse to the device and drag it to your Printers folder.  
Add the device and install the software from the INF file on your network. On the  
Starter CD, the INF files are stored in the root directory of the CD.  
To install the printer driver using Add Printer  
1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes.  
- Or -  
Click Start, click Control Panel, and then double-click Printers.  
2. Double-click Add Printer, and then click Next.  
3. Select Network Printer or Network Printer Server.  
4. Click Next.  
5. Do one of the following:  
Type in the network path or queue name of the shared device, and then click Next.  
Click Have Disk when prompted to select the device model.  
Click Next and locate the device in the list of shared printers.  
6. Click Next and follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation.  
Configure the device (Mac OS)  
You can use the device with a single Macintosh computer using a USB cable, or you  
can share it among other users on a network.  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
To install the software for network or direct connection  
To share the device on a locally shared network  
To install the software for network or direct connection  
1. Connect the device to your computer with a USB cable.  
2. Insert the Starter CD into the CD drive. Double-click the CD icon on the desktop,  
and then double-click the setup icon. Also, you can locate the Installer folder on  
the Starter CD.  
3. Click Install Software and follow the onscreen instructions.  
4. If necessary, share the device with other Macintosh computer users.  
•
Direct connection: Share the device with the other Macintosh computer  
users. For more information, see To share the device on a locally shared  
network.  
•
Network connection: Individual Macintosh computer users who want to use  
the device on the network must install the device software on their computers.  
128  
Configure and manage  
           
To share the device on a locally shared network  
When you connect the device directly, you can share it with other computers using a  
simple form of networking known as locally shared networking. Use this configuration  
only in small groups or when usage is low. The connected computer is slowed down  
when many users print to the device.  
Basic requirements for sharing in the Mac OS environment include the following items:  
•
•
•
The Macintosh computers must be communicating on the network using TCP/IP,  
and they must have IP addresses. (AppleTalk is not supported.)  
The device that is being shared must be connected to a built-in USB port on the  
host Macintosh computer.  
Both the host Macintosh computer and the client Macintosh computers that are  
using the shared device must have device sharing software installed, and the  
driver or PPD for the device that is installed. (You can run the installation program  
to install the device sharing software and associated Help files.)  
For more information about USB device sharing, see the support information on the  
Apple Web site (www.apple.com) or the Apple Macintosh Help on the computer.  
To share the device among computers running Mac OS  
1. Turn on printer sharing on all Macintosh computers (host and clients) that are  
connected to the printer. Depending on the OS version you are using, do one of  
the following:  
•
Mac OS 10.3: Open System Preferences, click Print & Fax, and then check  
the box next to Share my printers with other computers.  
•
Mac OS 10.4: Open System Preferences, click Print & Fax, click the Sharing  
tab, check the box next to Share these printers with other computers, and  
then select the printer to be shared.  
2. To print from the other Macintosh computers (the clients) on the network, do the  
following:  
a. Click File, and then select Page Setup in the document you want to print.  
b. In the drop-down menu next to Format for, select Shared Printers, and then  
select your device.  
c. Select the Paper Size, and then click OK.  
d. In the document, click File, and then select Print.  
e. From the drop-down menu next to Printer, select Shared Printers, and then  
select your device.  
f. Make additional settings, if necessary, and then click Print.  
Set up the device for wireless communication (some  
models only)  
You may set up the device for wireless communication using one of the following ways:  
Wireless communication mode  
Infrastructure  
Ad hoc*  
Control panel  
129  
Set up the device for wireless communication (some models only)  
           
Chapter 9  
(continued)  
Network cable  
For more information, see To set up the device on  
a wireless network (Mac OS) or To set up wireless  
communication using the installer (Windows).  
SecureEasySetup (SES)  
For more information, see To set up wireless  
communication using SecureEasySetup (SES).  
* An ad hoc network can be set up using the Wireless Connection Utility on the Starter  
CD.  
NOTE: If you encounter problems, see Solve wireless problems.  
To use the device with any wireless connection, you must run the installation  
program at least once from the Starter CD and create a wireless connection.  
Make sure the device is not connected to the network using a network cable.  
The sending device must have built-in 802.11 capabilities or an 802.11 wireless  
card installed.  
The device and the computers that use it must be on the same subnet.  
Before installing the device software, you may wish to find out the settings of your  
network. Obtain the information from your system administrators, or complete the  
following tasks:  
•
Obtain your network's network name or Service Set Identifier (SSID) and  
communication mode (infrastructure or ad hoc) from the configuration utility for the  
network's wireless access point (WAP) or the computer's network card.  
•
•
Find out the type of encryption your network uses, such as Wired Equivalent  
Privacy (WEP).  
Find out the security password or encryption key of the wireless device.  
Understand 802.11 wireless network settings  
Network name (SSID)  
By default, the device looks for the wireless network name or SSID named "hpsetup."  
Your network may have a different SSID.  
Communication mode  
There are two communication mode options:  
•
Ad hoc: On an ad hoc network, the device is set to ad hoc communication mode  
and communicates directly with other wireless devices without the use of a WAP.  
All devices on the ad hoc network must:  
•
•
•
Be 802.11 compatible  
Have ad hoc as the communication mode  
Have the same network name (SSID)  
130  
Configure and manage  
   
•
•
Be on the same subnet and same channel  
Have the same 802.11 security settings  
•
Infrastructure (recommended): On an infrastructure network, the device is set to  
infrastructure communication mode and communicates with other devices on the  
network, whether the devices are wired or wireless, through a WAP. WAPs  
commonly act as routers or gateways on small networks.  
Security settings  
NOTE: For the available settings for the device, see Understand the network  
configuration page.  
For more information on wireless security, visit www.weca.net/opensection/pdf/  
whitepaper_wi-fi_security4-29-03.pdf.  
•
Network authentication: The device's factory default setting is 'Open,' which  
does not require security for authorization or encryption. The other possible values  
are 'OpenThenShared,' 'Shared,' and 'WPA-PSK' (Wi-Fi® Protected Access Pre-  
Shared Key).  
WPA increases the level of over-the-air data protection and access control on  
existing and future Wi-Fi networks. It addresses all known weaknesses of WEP,  
the original native security mechanism in the 802.11 standard.  
WPA2 is the second generation of WPA security; it provides enterprise and  
consumer Wi-Fi users with a high level of assurance that only authorized users  
can access their wireless networks.  
•
Data encryption:  
•
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) provides security by encrypting data sent over  
radio waves from one wireless device to another wireless device. Devices on a  
WEP-enabled network use WEP keys to encode data. If your network uses  
WEP, you must know the WEP key(s) it uses.  
•
•
WPA uses the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for encryption and  
employs 802.1X authentication with one of the standard Extensible  
Authentication Protocol (EAP) types available today.  
WPA2 provides a new encryption scheme, the Advanced Encryption Standard  
(AES). AES is defined in counter cipher-block chaining mode (CCM) and  
supports the Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS) to enable security between  
client workstations operating in ad hoc mode.  
To set up wireless communication using the control panel with wireless setup  
wizard  
The Wireless Setup Wizard provides an easy way to set up and manage a wireless  
connection to your device.  
NOTE: To use this method, you must have a wireless network set up and running.  
1. Set up the device hardware (see the getting started guide or the setup poster that  
came with your device).  
2. On the control panel, press the Setup button.  
3. Press an arrow button to move to Network, and then press OK.  
131  
Set up the device for wireless communication (some models only)  
       
Chapter 9  
4. Press an arrow button to move to Wizard, and then press OK.  
5. Follow the display instructions to complete the setup.  
To set up wireless communication using the installer (Windows)  
For this method, you will need to have a network set up and running.  
1. Set up the device hardware (see the getting started guide).  
2. Remove the protective cover from the device's network port.  
3. Close any applications that are running on your computer system.  
4. Insert the Starter CD into the CD drive. The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD  
menu does not start automatically, double-click the setup icon on the Starter CD.  
5. On the CD menu, click Install and follow the onscreen instructions.  
6. On the Connection Type screen, select Wireless, and then click Next.  
NOTE: If the device cannot be found, you will have the option to temporarily  
use a network cable to communicate with the device and configure its wireless  
settings.  
Complete the following steps to temporarily connect the printer to your  
network if you are unable to establish wireless communication.  
a. Temporarily connect the device to the network with an Ethernet cable.  
b. Follow the onscreen instructions and disconnect the cable when prompted.  
7. On the Select a Network Name (SSID) screen, click Select a detected Wireless  
Network Name (SSID) to select the wireless network, or click Specify a wireless  
network to enter a new network name.  
8. If you chose to enter a new network name, enter it on the control panel, and then  
press Done.  
NOTE: If the SSID that you entered is not found, you will be asked to provide  
security information. If the network does not use encryption, setup will attempt  
to verify the SSID before continuing.  
9. If the device cannot connect to the network name, supply the appropriate WEP key  
or WPA passphrase on the keypad when prompted, and then press Done.  
132  
Configure and manage  
   
NOTE: Be sure to unplug the Ethernet cable when you are done.  
To set up wireless communication using SecureEasySetup (SES)  
If your wireless router is SES compatible, see the following instructions to set up using  
SES.  
NOTE: You will need a wireless access point with SecureEasySetup to use this  
method. Set your access point to SecureEasySetup mode. Refer to your access  
point documentation for more instructions.  
1. Press the SES button on the wireless router.  
2. Within 2 minutes, press Setup. If the device has a two-line display, select  
Network, select Wireless Setup Wizard, select SecureEasySetup, and then  
follow the onscreen instructions.  
3. Wait about 2 minutes, print the device's self-test diagnostic page, and verify that  
the SES settings match the router's wireless settings.  
NOTE: If the connection fails, you might need to reset the device's network  
settings or modify the wireless settings and repeat the steps. For more  
information, see Solve wireless problems.  
4. Close any applications that are running on your computer system.  
5. Insert the Starter CD into the CD drive. The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD  
menu does not start automatically, double-click the setup icon on the Starter CD.  
6. On the CD menu, click Install and follow the onscreen instructions.  
7. At the Connection Type dialog, select Wired network/Wireless and follow the  
onscreen instructions.  
To set up the device on a wireless network (Mac OS)  
1. Set up the device hardware (see the getting started guide).  
2. Ensure an AirPort card is installed on the computer.  
3. Close any applications that are running on your computer system.  
4. Open the AirPort Setup Assistant from the Utilities folder. Refer to the AirPort  
documentation for details on setting up on wireless networks.  
133  
Set up the device for wireless communication (some models only)  
       
Chapter 9  
5. For ad hoc networks, click the AirPort icon on the menu bar and select "hpsetup"  
under Computer to Computer Networks. For wireless networks, click the AirPort  
icon, and then click Other to join the network.  
6. Insert the Starter CD into the CD drive. The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD  
menu does not start automatically, double-click the setup icon on the Starter CD.  
7. On the CD menu, click Install Software and follow the onscreen instructions.  
8. On the Connection Type screen, select the wireless network option, and then  
click Done.  
9. Follow the onscreen instructions in the Network Printer Setup Utility, which starts  
running automatically, to install the printer driver.  
To turn off wireless communication  
On the control panel, press Setup, then select Network Menu, then select Wireless  
Radio, and then select either On or Off.  
Guidelines for reducing interference on a wireless network  
The following tips will help reduce the chances for interference in a wireless network:  
•
Keep the wireless devices away from large metal objects, such as filing cabinets,  
and other electromagnetic devices, such as microwaves and cordless telephones,  
as these objects can disrupt radio signals.  
•
•
•
Keep the wireless devices away from large masonry structures and other building  
structures as these objects can absorb radio waves and lower signal strength.  
For an infrastructure network, position the WAP in a central location in line of sight  
with the wireless devices on the network.  
Keep all wireless devices on the network within range of one another.  
Guidelines for ensuring wireless network security  
•
•
To add hardware addresses to a WAP  
Other guidelines  
To add hardware addresses to a WAP  
MAC filtering is a security feature in which a WAP is configured with a list of MAC  
addresses (also called "hardware addresses") of devices that are allowed to gain  
access to the network through the WAP.  
If the WAP does not have the hardware address of a device attempting to access the  
network, the WAP denies the device access to the network.  
If the WAP filters MAC addresses, then the device's MAC address must be added to  
the WAP's list of accepted MAC addresses.  
1. Print the network configuration page. For information on the network configuration  
page, see Understand the network configuration page.  
2. Open the WAP's configuration utility, and add the device's hardware address to the  
list of accepted MAC addresses.  
134  
Configure and manage  
             
Other guidelines  
To keep the wireless network secure, follow these guidelines:  
•
Use a password with at least 20 random characters. You can use up to 63  
characters in a WPA password.  
•
Avoid any common words or phrases, easy sequences of characters (such as all  
1s), and personally-identifiable information for passwords. Always use random  
strings composed of uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and if allowed,  
special characters such as punctuation.  
•
•
Change the password periodically.  
Change the default password provided by the manufacturer for administrator  
access to the access point or wireless router. Some routers let you change the  
administrator name as well.  
•
•
Place the access point or router in the center of a room and not near a window.  
Turn off administrative access over wireless if possible. If you do this, you need to  
connect to the router with a wired Ethernet connection when you want to make  
configuration changes.  
•
•
Turn off remote administrative access over the Internet on your router, if possible.  
You can use Remote Desktop to make an encrypted connection to a computer  
running behind your router and make configuration changes from the local  
computer you are accessing over the Internet.  
To avoid accidentally connecting to another party's wireless network, turn off the  
setting to automatically connect to non-preferred networks. This is disabled by  
default in Windows XP.  
Set up the device for Bluetooth communication  
The HP Bluetooth Wireless Printer Adapter allows you to print documents from  
Bluetooth devices without a cable connection. Simply insert the HP Bluetooth adapter  
into the front USB port and print from a Bluetooth device such as a PDA or camera  
phone. You can also use Bluetooth technology to print from a computer to the device.  
To set up the device for Bluetooth communication from the control panel  
1. Insert the HP Bluetooth Adapter into the front USB port (shown in the graphic  
below).  
135  
Set up the device for Bluetooth communication  
     
Chapter 9  
2. Some Bluetooth devices exchange addresses when they communicate with each  
other and establish a connection. Also, some Bluetooth devices display the name  
of the other device when connected. If you do not want the default name displayed  
as the name of your device, you can change the device name.  
Do the following, as appropriate:  
To find out the address of the device  
a. Press Setup.  
b. Select Bluetooth, and then select Device Address. The device address is  
displayed, which is read only.  
c. To enter the address into your all-in-one, follow the instructions that came with  
your Bluetooth device.  
To change the name of the device from the default  
a. Press Setup.  
b. Select Bluetooth, and then select Device Name.  
NOTE: The device ships with the predefined name of "Officejet L7XXX  
Series."  
c. Use the keypad to enter a new name.  
d. When you have finished entering a name for the device, press OK.  
The name you entered will appear on your Bluetooth device when you connect  
to the device to print.  
3. Press OK to exit the Setup menu.  
To set up the device for Bluetooth communication via the embedded Web server  
▲ Open the embedded Web server, click the Bluetooth tab, complete the required  
fields in each section, and then click Apply.  
To change the device name from the default via the embedded Web server  
▲ Open the embedded Web server, click the Bluetooth tab, type a new name in the  
Device Name field, and then click Apply.  
Connect the device with Bluetooth  
With a Bluetooth connection you can access many of the same printing features as  
with a USB connection. For example, you can check the device status, as well as the  
estimated amount of ink remaining in your ink cartridges.  
NOTE: The only software functionality available with a Bluetooth connection is  
printing. Scanning and software-based faxing cannot be done over a Bluetooth  
connection. However, stand-alone copy and fax functions are still available.  
Connecting the device with Bluetooth on Windows  
You must have Windows XP and either the Microsoft Bluetooth Protocol Stack or the  
Widcomm/Broadcom Bluetooth Protocol Stack installed in order to connect the device.  
136  
Configure and manage  
         
It is possible to have both the Microsoft Stack and the Widcomm/Broadcom Stack on  
your computer, but use only one of them to connect the device.  
•
Microsoft stack: If you have Windows XP with Service Pack 2 installed on your  
computer, then your computer has the Microsoft Bluetooth Protocol Stack. The  
Microsoft stack allows you to install an external Bluetooth adapter automatically. If  
your Bluetooth adapter supports the Microsoft stack but it does not install  
automatically, then you do not have the Microsoft stack on your computer. Check  
the documentation that came with the Bluetooth adapter to see if it supports the  
Microsoft stack.  
•
Widcomm/Broadcom stack: If you have an HP computer with Bluetooth built in,  
or if you have installed an HP Bluetooth adapter, then your computer has the  
Widcomm/Broadcom stack. If you have an HP computer and plug in an  
HP Bluetooth adapter, it will install automatically using the Widcomm/Broadcom  
stack.  
To install and print using the Microsoft stack  
NOTE: Make sure that you have installed the device software on the computer.  
The purpose of installing the software is to make sure the printer driver is available  
for the Bluetooth connection. Therefore, if you have already installed the software,  
you do not need to reinstall it. If you want both a USB and a Bluetooth connection  
to the device, install the USB connection first. For more information, see Direct  
connection. However, if you do not want a USB connection, select Directly to the  
computer on the Connection Type screen. Also, on the Connect Your Device  
Now screen, select the check box next to If you are unable to connect your  
device now... at the bottom of the screen.  
1. Attach an HP Bluetooth adapter to the front USB port of the device.  
2. If you are using an external Bluetooth adapter for your computer, make sure your  
computer is started and then attach the Bluetooth adapter to a USB port on the  
computer. If you have Windows XP with Service Pack 2 installed, the Bluetooth  
drivers are installed automatically. If you are prompted to select a Bluetooth profile,  
select HCRP.  
If your computer has Bluetooth built in, just make sure the computer is started.  
3. On the Windows taskbar, click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.  
4. Double-click the Add Printer icon.  
5. Click Next, and then select A Bluetooth Printer.  
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to finish the installation.  
7. Print as you would to any printer.  
To install and print using the Widcomm/Broadcom stack  
1. Make sure that you have installed the device software on the computer.  
2. Attach an HP Bluetooth adapter to the front USB port.  
3. Click the My Bluetooth Places icon on the desktop or in the taskbar.  
4. Click View devices in range.  
5. Once the available devices are discovered, double-click the name of the device to  
finish the installation.  
6. Print as you would to any device.  
137  
Set up the device for Bluetooth communication  
Chapter 9  
Connect the device with Bluetooth on Mac OS  
You can connect the device to a Mac that has Bluetooth built in, or you can install an  
external Bluetooth adapter.  
To install and print using Bluetooth  
NOTE: Mac Bluetooth must be enabled in the OS. To verify, open System  
Preferences, click on Network, select Network Port Configurations, and then  
assure that Bluetooth is checked.  
1. Make sure that you have installed the device software on the computer.  
2. Attach an HP Bluetooth Adapter to the front USB port of the device.  
3. Press the Power button on the control panel to turn the device off, and press it  
again to turn it on.  
4. Attach an HP Bluetooth adapter to the computer and turn it on. Make sure that you  
have installed the software that came with the adapter. Or, if your computer has  
Bluetooth built in, just turn on your computer.  
5. Open the Printer Setup Utility.  
6. In the Printer List, click Add.  
The computer searches for the device.  
7. Depending on the Mac OS version you are using, do one of the following:  
▲ Mac OS 10.3: Select Bluetooth from the pull-down menu.  
▲ Mac OS 10.4: Assure that connection type Bluetooth is selected in the  
Default Browser tab.  
8. Select Bluetooth from the pull-down menu. Select the all-in-one and click Add.  
The all-in-one is added to the device list.  
9. Print as you would to any device.  
Set Bluetooth security for the device  
You can enable the following device security settings either through the control panel  
menu or the embedded Web server:  
•
Require passkey authentication prior to someone printing to the device from a  
Bluetooth device.  
•
Make the device visible or invisible to Bluetooth devices that are within range.  
138  
Configure and manage  
       
Use a passkey to authenticate Bluetooth devices  
You can set the security level of the device to either High or Low.  
•
Low: The device does not require a passkey. Any Bluetooth device within range  
can print to it.  
NOTE: The default security setting is Low. Low level security does not  
require authentication.  
•
High: The device requires a passkey from the Bluetooth device before allowing it  
to send a print job to it. The passkey must be 1 to 4 characters long, and can only  
consist of numbers.  
NOTE: The device ships with a predefined passkey that is set to four zeroes  
"0000".  
To set the device to require passkey authentication via the control panel  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Select Bluetooth, and then select Passkey.  
3. Use the keypad to enter a new passkey.  
4. When you have finished entering your passkey, press OK.  
5. Select Security Level, and then select High.  
6. Press OK.  
High level security requires authentication.  
Passkey authentication is now set for the device.  
To set the device to require passkey authentication via the embedded Web server  
▲ Open the embedded Web server, click the Bluetooth tab, enter a new passkey in  
the Passkey section, click High in the Security Level section, and then click Apply.  
To set the device to be visible or not visible to Bluetooth devices  
You can set the device to be either visible to Bluetooth devices (public) or not visible to  
any (private).  
•
•
Visible: Any Bluetooth device within range can print to the device.  
Not visible: Only Bluetooth devices that have stored the device address of the all-  
in-one can print to it.  
NOTE: The device ships with a default accessibility level of Visible.  
To set the device to be not visible from the control panel  
1. Press Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Bluetooth, and then press Visibility.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Not Visible, and then press OK.  
The all-in-one is inaccessible to Bluetooth devices that have not stored its device  
address.  
139  
Set up the device for Bluetooth communication  
   
Chapter 9  
To set the device to be not visible from the embedded Web server  
▲ Open the embedded Web server, click the Bluetooth tab, select Not Visible in the  
Visibility section, and then click Apply.  
Reset Bluetooth settings via the embedded Web server  
To reset Bluetooth settings on the device to the factory defaults:  
1. Open the embedded Web server, and then click the Bluetooth tab.  
2. Click Reset Bluetooth in the Reset Bluetooth section, and then click Apply.  
Uninstall and reinstall the software  
If your installation is incomplete, or if you connected the USB cable to the computer  
before prompted by the software installation screen, you might need to uninstall and  
then reinstall the software. Do not simply delete the device application files from your  
computer. Make sure to remove them properly using the uninstall utility provided when  
you installed the software that came with the device.  
There are three methods to uninstall the software on a Windows computer, and one  
method to uninstall on a Macintosh computer.  
To uninstall from a Windows computer, method 1  
1. Disconnect the device from your computer. Do not connect it to your computer until  
after you have reinstalled the software.  
2. Press the Power button to turn off the device.  
3. On the Windows taskbar, click Start, select Programs or All Programs, select  
HP, select Officejet Pro L7XXX Series, and then click Uninstall.  
4. Follow the onscreen instructions.  
5. If you are asked whether you would like to remove shared files, click No.  
Other programs that use these files might not work properly if the files are deleted.  
6. Restart your computer.  
7. To reinstall the software, insert the device Starter CD into your computer's CD-  
ROM drive, follow the onscreen instructions, and also see To install the software  
before connecting the device (recommended).  
8. After the software is installed, connect the device to your computer.  
9. Press the Power button to turn the device on.  
After connecting and turning on the device, you might have to wait several minutes  
for all of the Plug and Play events to complete.  
10. Follow the onscreen instructions.  
When the software installation is complete, the HP Digital Imaging Monitor icon  
appears in the Windows system tray.  
To uninstall from a Windows computer, method 2  
NOTE: Use this method if Uninstall is not available in the Windows Start menu.  
140  
Configure and manage  
     
1. On the Windows taskbar, click Start, select Settings, select Control Panel, and  
then click Add/Remove Programs.  
- Or -  
Click Start, click Control Panel, and then double-click Programs and Features.  
2. Select HP Officejet Pro All-in-One Series, and then click Change/Remove or  
Uninstall/Change.  
Follow the onscreen instructions.  
3. Disconnect the device from your computer.  
4. Restart your computer.  
NOTE: It is important that you disconnect the device before restarting your  
computer. Do not connect the device to your computer until after you have  
reinstalled the software.  
5. Insert the device Starter CD into your computer's CD-ROM drive and then start the  
Setup program.  
6. Follow the onscreen instructions and also see To install the software before  
connecting the device (recommended).  
To uninstall from a Windows computer, method 3  
NOTE: Use this method if Uninstall is not available in the Windows Start menu.  
1. Insert the device Starter CD into your computer's CD-ROM drive, and then start  
the Setup program.  
2. Disconnect the device from your computer.  
3. Select Uninstall and follow the onscreen directions.  
4. Restart your computer.  
NOTE: It is important that you disconnect the device before restarting your  
computer. Do not connect the device to your computer until after you have  
reinstalled the software.  
5. Start the Setup program for the device again.  
6. Select Install.  
7. Follow the onscreen instructions and also see To install the software before  
connecting the device (recommended).  
To uninstall from a Macintosh computer  
1. Launch HP Device Manager.  
2. Click Information and Settings.  
3. Select Uninstall HP AiO Software from the pull-down menu.  
Follow the onscreen instructions.  
4. After the software is uninstalled, restart your computer.  
5. To reinstall the software, insert the device Starter CD into your computer's CD-  
ROM drive.  
Uninstall and reinstall the software  
141  
 
Chapter 9  
6. On the desktop, open the CD-ROM, and then double-click HP All-in-One Installer.  
7. Follow the onscreen instructions and also see To install the software before  
connecting the device (recommended).  
142  
Configure and manage  
10 Maintain and troubleshoot  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Supported ink cartridges  
Replace the ink cartridges  
Maintain the printheads  
Store printing supplies  
Clean the device  
Troubleshooting tips and resources  
Solve printing problems  
Poor print quality and unexpected printouts  
Solve paper-feed problems  
Solve copy problems  
Solve scan problems  
Solve fax problems  
Solve photo (memory card) problems  
Solve device management problems  
Troubleshoot installation issues  
Clear jams  
Supported ink cartridges  
The availability of ink cartridges varies by country/region. The ink cartridges might  
come in different sizes. To obtain a list of supported ink cartridges for your device,  
print the self-test diagnostic page and read the information in the ink cartridge status  
section. [For more information, see Understand the self-test diagnostic page .]  
You can find the ink cartridge number in the following places:  
•
•
•
On the self-test diagnostic page (see Understand the self-test diagnostic page).  
On the label of the ink cartridge you are replacing.  
Windows: From the Toolbox, if you have bidirectional communication, click the  
Estimated Ink Levels tab, scroll to display the Cartridge Details button, and then  
click Cartridge Details.  
•
Mac OS: From the HP Printer Utility, click Supply Info from the Information and  
Support panel, and then click Retail Supplies Information.  
NOTE: Ink from the cartridges is used in the printing process in a number of  
different ways, including in the initialization process, which prepares the device and  
cartridges for printing, and in printhead servicing, which keeps print nozzles clear  
and ink flowing smoothly. In addition, some residual ink is left in the cartridge after  
it is used. For more information see www.hp.com/go/inkusage.  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
143  
     
Chapter 10  
Replace the ink cartridges  
You can check the estimated ink levels from the Toolbox (Windows), the HP Printer  
Utility (Mac OS), or the embedded Web server. For information about using these  
tools, see Use device management tools. You can also print the self-test diagnostic  
page to view this information (see Understand the self-test diagnostic page).  
NOTE: The ink levels shown are an estimate only. Actual ink volumes may vary.  
After removing a cartridge from its package, install it right away. Do not remove a  
cartridge from the device for long periods of time.  
To find out which ink cartridges work with your device, see Supplies.  
To replace the ink cartridges  
1. Gently pull open the ink cartridge cover.  
2. Remove the ink cartridge that requires replacement by grasping it between your  
thumb and forefinger and pulling it firmly toward you.  
3. Remove the new ink cartridge from its package.  
4. Align the cartridge with its color-coded slot and insert the cartridge into the slot.  
Press down firmly on the cartridge to ensure proper contact.  
5. Close the ink cartridge cover.  
144  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
   
Maintain the printheads  
If printed characters are incomplete, or dots or lines are missing from printouts, ink  
nozzles might be clogged and you might need to clean the printheads.  
When the quality of printouts deteriorates, complete the relevant steps based on the  
following sequence:  
1. Check the health of the printheads. For more information, see To check printhead  
health.  
2. Print the print quality diagnostic page on a clean sheet of white paper. Evaluate  
any problem areas, and perform the recommended actions. For more information,  
see To print the print quality diagnostic page.  
3. Manually clean the printhead contacts. For more information, see To clean the  
printheads.  
4. Replace the printheads if the problems persist after cleaning. For more  
information, see To replace the printheads.  
CAUTION: HP is not responsible for damage to the device that results from  
modifying the printheads.  
To check printhead health  
Use one of the following means to check the printhead health. If the status of any  
printhead is not good or fair, then perform one or more of the maintenance functions,  
or clean or replace the printhead.  
•
•
•
Self-Test Diagnostic page: Print the self-test diagnostic page on a clean sheet of  
white paper, and check the printhead health section. For more information, see  
Understand the self-test diagnostic page.  
Embedded Web server: Open the embedded Web server. For more information,  
see To open the embedded Web server. Click the Information tab, and then click  
Ink Supplies in the left pane.  
Toolbox (Windows): Open the Toolbox. For more information, see To open the  
Toolbox. Click the Information tab, and then click Printhead Health.  
To print the print quality diagnostic page  
Use the print quality diagnostic page to diagnose issues affecting the print quality. This  
will help you decide whether to run any maintenance tools to improve the print quality  
of your printouts. You can also view the ink level information, and the printhead health  
status on the page.  
•
Control panel: Press the Setup button, select Print Report, select Print Quality  
Page, and then press OK.  
•
Embedded Web server: Click the Settings tab, click Device Services in the left  
pane, select Print PQ (print quality) diagnostic page from the drop-down list in  
the Print Quality section, and then click Run Diagnostic.  
•
•
Toolbox (Windows): Click the Services tab, and then click Print PQ (print  
quality) diagnostic page and follow the onscreen instructions.  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS): Click Print Quality Diagnostics from the  
Information and Support panel.  
145  
Maintain the printheads  
           
Chapter 10  
1
Printer Information: Shows device information (such as the product model number, serial  
number, and firmware version number), the number of pages printed from the trays and  
duplexer, the ink level information, and the printhead health status.  
2
3
4
Test Pattern 1: If the lines are not straight and connected, align the printheads. For more  
information, see To align the printheads.  
Test Pattern 2: If there are thin white lines across any of the colored blocks, clean the  
printheads. For more information, see To clean the printheads.  
Test Pattern 3: If there are dark lines or white gaps where the arrows are pointing,  
calibrate the linefeed. For more information, see To calibrate the linefeed.  
To align the printheads  
Whenever you replace a printhead, the device automatically aligns the printheads to  
ensure the best print quality. However, if the appearance of your printed pages  
indicates that the printheads are misaligned, you can start the alignment process  
manually.  
•
Control panel: Press the Setup button, select Tools, select Align Printer, and  
then press OK. Press OK when the alignment is done to continue.  
•
Embedded Web server: Click the Settings tab, click Device Services in the left  
pane, select Align Printheads from the drop-down list in the Print Quality  
section, and then click Run Diagnostic.  
•
•
Toolbox (Windows): Click the Services tab, and then click Align Printheads and  
follow the onscreen instructions.  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS): Click Align from the Information and Support panel.  
146  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
   
To calibrate the linefeed  
•
Control panel: Press theSetup button, select Tools, select Calibrate Linefeed,  
and then press OK.  
•
Embedded Web server: Click the Settings tab, click Device Services in the left  
pane, select Calibrate Linefeed from the drop-down list in the Print Quality  
section, and then click Run Diagnostic.  
•
•
Toolbox (Windows): Click the Services tab, and then click Calibrate Linefeed  
and follow the onscreen instructions.  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS): Click Calibrate Linefeed from the Information and  
Support panel.  
To clean the printheads  
NOTE: Cleaning uses ink, so clean the printheads only when necessary.  
The cleaning process takes up to 3.5 minutes. Some noise might be generated in  
the process.  
•
•
Control panel: Press the Setup button, select Tools, and then select Clean  
Printhead.  
Embedded Web server: Click the Device Settings tab, click Device Services in  
the left pane, select Clean printheads from the drop-down list in the Print Quality  
section, and then click Run Diagnostic.  
•
•
Toolbox (Windows): Click the Services tab, and then click Clean Printheads  
and follow the onscreen instructions.  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS): Click Clean from the Information and Support panel.  
To clean the printhead contacts manually  
After the printheads are installed, you might get a control panel message telling you  
the device will not print. If you receive this message, you might need to clean the  
electrical contacts on the printheads and in the device.  
CAUTION: Clean the electrical contacts only after you have attempted to clean  
the printheads. Electrical contacts contain sensitive electronic components that can  
be damaged easily. For more information, see To clean the printheads.  
1. Open the top cover.  
2. If the carriage does not move to the left automatically, press and hold the OK  
button for five seconds. Wait for the carriage to stop moving, and then unplug the  
power cord from the printer.  
147  
Maintain the printheads  
           
Chapter 10  
3. Lift the printhead latch.  
4. Lift the handle of the printhead (which corresponds to the control panel message)  
and use it to pull the printhead out of its slot.  
5. Obtain clean, dry, soft and lint-free cleaning material. Suitable materials include  
paper coffee filters and eyeglass lens cleaning paper.  
CAUTION: Do not use water.  
148  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
6. Wipe the electrical contacts on the printhead but do not touch the nozzles.  
NOTE: The electrical contacts are small copper-color squares, grouped on  
one face of the printhead.  
The nozzles are on a different face of the printhead. Ink will be visible on the  
nozzles.  
CAUTION: Touching the nozzles can cause permanent nozzle damage. Also,  
ink can permanently mark clothing.  
7. After cleaning, place the printhead on a sheet of paper or paper towel. Make sure  
the nozzles are facing up and are not in contact with the paper.  
149  
Maintain the printheads  
Chapter 10  
8. Clean the electrical contacts in the printhead slot inside the device with a clean,  
dry, soft and lint-free cloth.  
9. Plug in the power cord and turn on the device. The control panel should indicate  
that the printhead is missing.  
10. Insert the printhead into its color-coded slot (the label on the printhead must match  
the label on the printhead latch). Press down firmly on the printhead to ensure  
proper contact.  
11. Pull the printhead latch all the way forward, and then press down to ensure that  
the latch is properly engaged. You might have to apply some pressure to engage  
the latch.  
12. Where necessary, repeat the above steps for the remaining printhead.  
13. Close the top cover.  
14. If the control panel message remains, repeat the cleaning procedure described  
above for the printhead which corresponds to the message.  
15. If the control panel message remains, replace the printhead which corresponds to  
the message.  
16. Wait while the device initializes the printheads and prints the alignment pages. If  
the device does not print the pages, start the alignment process manually. For  
more information, see To align the printheads.  
To replace the printheads  
NOTE: To find out which printheads work with your printer, see Supplies.  
1. Open the top cover.  
2. If the carriage does not move to the left automatically, press and hold the OK  
button for 5 seconds. Wait for the carriage to stop moving.  
150  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
   
3. Lift the printhead latch.  
4. Lift the handle of a printhead and use it to pull the printhead out of its slot.  
5. Before installing a printhead, shake the printhead up and down at least six times  
while the printhead is still in its packaging.  
151  
Maintain the printheads  
Chapter 10  
6. Remove the new printhead from its package, and then remove its orange  
protective caps.  
CAUTION: Do not shake printheads after the caps are removed.  
7. Insert the printhead into its color-coded slot (the label on the printhead must match  
the label on the printhead latch). Press down firmly on the printhead to ensure  
proper contact.  
8. Pull the printhead latch all the way forward, and then press down to ensure that  
the latch is properly engaged. You might have to apply some pressure to engage  
the latch.  
9. Close the top cover.  
10. Wait while the device initializes the printheads and prints the alignment pages. If  
the device does not print the pages, start the alignment process manually. For  
more information, see To align the printheads.  
Store printing supplies  
This section covers the following topics:  
Store ink cartridges  
Store printheads  
•
•
Store ink cartridges  
Ink cartridges can be left in the device for extended periods of time. If you remove the  
ink cartridges, place them in an airtight container, such as a resealable plastic bag.  
Store printheads  
Printheads can be left in the device for extended periods of time. If you remove the  
printheads, place them in an airtight container, such as a resealable plastic bag.  
Clean the device  
This section provides instructions for keeping the device in top working condition.  
Perform these maintenance procedures as necessary.  
152  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
         
Dust or dirt on the scanner glass, ADF lid backing, or ADF frame can slow down  
performance, degrade the quality of scans, and affect the accuracy of special features  
such as fitting copies to a certain page size.  
Clean the scanner glass  
To clean the scanner glass  
1. Turn off the device.  
2. Lift the ADF.  
3. Clean the glass by using a soft, lint-free cloth that has been sprayed with a mild  
glass cleaner. Dry the glass with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth.  
CAUTION: Use only glass cleaner to clean the scanner glass. Avoid cleaners  
that contain abrasives, acetone, benzene, and carbon tetrachloride, all of which  
can damage the scanner glass. Avoid isopropyl alcohol because it can leave  
streaks on the glass.  
CAUTION: Do not spray the glass cleaner directly on the glass. If too much  
glass cleaner is applied, the cleaner could leak under the glass and damage  
the scanner.  
4. Close the ADF, and turn on the device.  
Clean the automatic document feeder (ADF)  
The ADF requires periodic cleaning depending on the amount of use and the type of  
paper that is fed through it. If you use the ADF several times per week, monthly  
cleaning is recommended. Set up a cleaning routine that is appropriate for the device.  
If streaks exist on scanned documents, cleaning the ADF frame might solve the  
problem.  
153  
Clean the device  
     
Chapter 10  
To clean the ADF  
1. Turn off the device.  
2. Lift the ADF.  
3. Locate the ADF frame on the underside of the ADF.  
4. Press the ADF frame release.  
154  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
5. Unhook and remove the ADF frame.  
6. Clean the ADF frame by using a soft, lint-free cloth that has been sprayed with a  
mild glass cleaner. Clean both sides of the transparent film, including the white  
strip on the inside of the ADF frame.  
CAUTION: Use only glass cleaner. Avoid cleaners that contain abrasives,  
acetone, benzene, and carbon tetrachloride, all of which can damage the ADF  
frame. Avoid isopropyl alcohol because it can leave streaks.  
7. Follow these steps to replace the ADF frame:  
a. Lift the ADF lid backing, and then hook the ADF frame into the ADF lid.  
155  
Clean the device  
Chapter 10  
b. Slide the ADF frame under the backing, and then snap it into place.  
CAUTION: ADF frame must be under the backing for ADF to function.  
8. Close the ADF and then turn on the device.  
To clean the ADF lid backing  
1. Turn off the device.  
2. Lift the ADF.  
3. Clean the white ADF lid backing by using a soft, lint-free cloth that has been  
sprayed with a mild glass cleaner. Wash the backing gently to loosen debris; do  
not scrub the backing.  
4. Dry the backing with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth.  
CAUTION: Do not use paper-based wipes, because these might scratch the  
backing.  
5. If this does not clean the backing thoroughly, repeat the previous steps using  
isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol. Wipe the backing with a damp cloth to remove any  
residual alcohol, and then dry the backing with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth.  
6. Close the ADF and then turn on the device.  
156  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
Clean the exterior  
NOTE: Before cleaning the device, turn off the power and unplug the power cord  
from the electrical socket.  
Use a soft, damp, lint-free cloth to wipe dust, smudges, and stains off of the case. The  
exterior of the device does not require cleaning. Keep fluids away from the interior of  
the device, as well as from the control panel.  
Troubleshooting tips and resources  
Use the following tips and resources to resolve printing problems.  
•
•
For a paper jam, see Clear a jam in the device.  
For paper-feed problems, such as the paper skew and paper pick, see Solve  
paper-feed problems.  
•
Power light is on and not blinking. When the device is turned on for the first time, it  
takes approximately 12 minutes to initialize it after the printheads are installed.  
•
•
No error messages appear on the computer screen.  
Power cord and other cables are working, and are firmly connected to the device.  
Make sure the device is connected firmly to a functioning alternating current (AC)  
power outlet, and is turned on. For voltage requirements, see Electrical  
specifications.  
•
•
Media is loaded correctly in the tray and is not jammed in the device.  
Printheads and ink cartridges are properly installed in their correct color-coded  
slots. Press down firmly on each one to ensure proper contact. Ensure you have  
removed the orange protective caps from each printhead.  
•
•
•
•
Printhead latch and all covers are closed.  
The rear access panel or optional duplexer is locked into place.  
All packing tapes and materials are removed.  
The device can print a self-test diagnostic page. For more information, see  
Understand the self-test diagnostic page.  
•
The device is set as the current or default printer. For Windows, set it as the  
default in the Printers folder. For the Mac OS, set it as the default in the Printer  
Setup Utility. See your computer's documentation for more information.  
•
•
Pause Printing is not selected if you are using a computer running Windows.  
You are not running too many programs when you are performing a task. Close  
programs that you are not using or restart the computer before attempting the task  
again.  
•
You can have a static IP address for wired networking, and have a dynamic IP  
address for wireless networking, and vice versa. For more information, see To  
Change IP settings.  
157  
Troubleshooting tips and resources  
       
Chapter 10  
To set a static IP address  
1. Open the embedded Web server, click the Networking tab, click Wired (802.3) or  
Wireless (802.11) in the left pane, and then click the IP Configuration sub-tab.  
2. Select Manual IP, and then type the static IP address in the Manual IP Address  
box.  
3. Enter the Manual Subnet Mask and the Manual Default Gateway, if necessary,  
and then click Apply.  
CAUTION: Changing the IP address can disrupt the current connection to the  
embedded Web server.  
Solve printing problems  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The device shuts down unexpectedly  
Error message appears on control-panel display  
The device is not responding (nothing prints)  
Device does not accept printhead  
Device takes a long time to print  
Blank or partial page printed  
Something on the page is missing or incorrect  
Placement of the text or graphics is wrong  
The device prints half a page, then ejects the paper  
The device shuts down unexpectedly  
Check the power and power connections  
Make sure the device is connected firmly to a functioning alternating current (AC)  
power outlet. For voltage requirements, see Electrical specifications.  
Error message appears on control-panel display  
A non-recoverable error has occurred  
Disconnect all cables (such as power cord, network cable, and USB cable), wait about  
20 seconds, and reconnect the cables. If the problem persists, visit the HP Web site  
(www.hp.com/support) for the latest troubleshooting information, or product fixes and  
updates.  
The device is not responding (nothing prints)  
If the device supports wireless communication, see also Solve wireless problems.  
Check the device setup  
For more information, see Troubleshooting tips and resources.  
158  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
               
Check the printhead initialization  
When printheads are installed or replaced, the device automatically prints a few  
alignment pages to align the printheads. This process takes about 12 minutes. Until  
this process is complete, only the automatic alignment pages can be printed.  
Check the device software installation  
If the device is turned off when printing, an alert message should appear on your  
computer screen; otherwise, the device software might not be installed correctly. To  
resolve this, uninstall the software completely, and then reinstall the device software.  
For more information, see Uninstall and reinstall the software.  
Check the cable connections  
•
•
Make sure both ends of the network/USB cable are secure.  
If the device is connected to a network, check the following:  
•
•
•
Check the Link light on the back of the device.  
Make sure you are not using a phone cord to connect the device.  
The network hub, switch, or router is turned on and working properly.  
Check the device setup for a network environment  
Ensure the correct device driver and printer driver port are being used. For more  
information about network connections, see Configure the device (Windows),  
Configure the device (Mac OS), or the documentation provided by your network  
vendors.  
Check any personal firewall software installed on the computer  
The personal software firewall is a security program that protects a computer from  
intrusion. However, the firewall might block communication between the computer and  
the device. If there is a problem communicating with the device, try temporarily  
disabling the firewall. If the problem persists, the firewall is not the source of the  
communication problem. Re-enable the firewall.  
If disabling the firewall allows you to communicate with the device, you might want to  
assign a static IP address to the device and re-enable the firewall. For more  
information, see To Change IP settings.  
Device does not accept printhead  
Check the printhead latch  
Make sure the printhead latch is properly closed.  
Check the printhead  
•
Make sure the printhead is inserted into its correct color-coded slot. For more  
information, see To replace the printheads.  
•
Remove the printhead, and check to make sure the orange protective caps have  
been removed from the printhead.  
159  
Solve printing problems  
     
Chapter 10  
Clean the printhead  
Complete the printhead cleaning procedure. For more information, see Maintain the  
printheads.  
Turn off the device after removing the printhead  
After removing the printhead, turn off the device, wait about 20 seconds, and turn it on  
again without the printhead installed. After the device has restarted, reinsert the  
printhead.  
Device takes a long time to print  
Check the system configuration  
Make sure the computer meets the minimum system requirements for the device. For  
more information, see System requirements.  
Check the device software settings  
Print speed is slower when Best or Maximum dpi is selected as the print quality. To  
increase the print speed, select different print settings in the device driver. For more  
information, see Change print settings.  
Check for radio interference  
If the device is connected using wireless communication and is printing slowly, then  
the radio signal might be weak. For more information, see Guidelines for reducing  
interference on a wireless network.  
Blank or partial page printed  
Check for empty ink cartridges  
Check the control panel to see which cartridge is low or empty. The Toolbox  
(Windows), HP Printer Utility (Mac OS), and the self-test diagnostic page (see  
Understand the self-test diagnostic page) provide information about ink levels. If you  
are printing black text and a blank page prints, the black cartridge might be empty. For  
more information, see Replace the ink cartridges.  
Check the printhead latch  
Make sure the printhead latch is properly closed.  
Check the printhead  
•
Make sure the printhead is inserted into its correct color-coded slot. For more  
information, see To replace the printheads.  
•
Remove the printhead, and check to make sure the orange protective caps have  
been removed from the printhead.  
Clean the printhead  
Complete the printhead cleaning procedure. For more information, see Maintain the  
printheads.  
160  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
       
Turn off the device after removing the printhead  
After removing the printhead, turn off the device, wait about 20 seconds, and turn it on  
again without the printhead installed. After it has restarted, reinsert the printhead.  
Something on the page is missing or incorrect  
Check the printheads  
Print the print quality diagnostic page on a clean sheet of white paper. Evaluate any  
problem areas, and perform the recommended actions. For more information, see To  
print the print quality diagnostic page.  
Check the margin settings  
Make sure the margin settings for the document do not exceed the printable area of  
the device. For more information, see Set minimum margins.  
Check the color print settings  
Make sure Print in Grayscale is not selected in the print driver.  
Check the device location and length of USB cable  
High electromagnetic fields (such as those generated by USB cables) can sometimes  
cause slight distortions to printouts. Move the device away from the source of the  
electromagnetic fields. Also, it is recommended that you use a USB cable that is less  
than 3 meters (9.8 feet) long to minimize the effects of these electromagnetic fields.  
Placement of the text or graphics is wrong  
Check how the media is loaded  
Make sure the media width and length guides fit snugly against the edges of the stack  
of media, and make sure the trays are not overloaded. For more information, see Load  
media.  
Check the media size  
•
Content on a page might be cut off if the document size is larger than the media  
that you are using.  
•
Make sure the media size selected in the printer driver match the size of media  
loaded in the tray.  
Check the margin settings  
If the text or graphics are cut off at the edges of the page, make sure the margin  
settings for the document do not exceed the printable area of your device. For more  
information, see Set minimum margins.  
Check the page-orientation setting  
Make sure the media size and page orientation selected in the application match the  
settings in the printer driver. For more information, see Change print settings.  
161  
Solve printing problems  
       
Chapter 10  
Check the device location and length of USB cable  
High electromagnetic fields (such as those generated by USB cables) can sometimes  
cause slight distortions to printouts. Move the device away from the source of the  
electromagnetic fields. Also, it is recommended that you use a USB cable that is less  
than 3 meters (9.8 feet) long to minimize the effects of these electromagnetic fields.  
If the above solutions do not work, the problem may be caused by the inability of the  
application to interpret print settings properly. See the release notes for known  
software conflicts, refer to the application's documentation, or contact the software  
manufacturer for specific help.  
The device prints half a page, then ejects the paper  
Check the ink cartridges  
The ink cartridges may have run out of ink, and the print job was cancelled. Replace  
the ink cartridges, and then resend the print job to the device. For more information,  
see Replace the ink cartridges.  
Poor print quality and unexpected printouts  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Poor quality printouts  
Meaningless characters print  
Ink is smearing  
Ink is not filling the text or graphics completely  
Output is faded or dull colored  
Colors are printing as black and white  
Wrong colors are printing  
Printout shows bleeding colors  
Colors do not line up properly  
Lines or dots are missing from text or graphics  
Poor quality printouts  
Check the printheads and ink cartridges  
Print the print quality diagnostic page on a clean sheet of white paper. Evaluate any  
problem areas, and perform the recommended actions. For more information, see To  
print the print quality diagnostic page.  
Check the paper quality  
The paper might be too moist or too rough. Make sure the media meets HP  
specifications, and try to print again. For more information, see Select print media.  
162  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
       
Check the type of media loaded in the device  
•
Make sure the tray supports the type of media you have loaded. For more  
information, see Understand specifications for supported media.  
•
Make sure you have selected the tray in the print driver that contains the media  
that you want to use.  
Check the device location and length of USB cable  
High electromagnetic fields (such as those generated by USB cables) can sometimes  
cause slight distortions to printouts. Move the device away from the source of the  
electromagnetic fields. Also, it is recommended that you use a USB cable that is less  
than 3 meters (9.8 feet) long to minimize the effects of these electromagnetic fields.  
Meaningless characters print  
If an interruption occurs to a job that is printing, the device might not recognize the rest  
of the job.  
Cancel the print job and wait for the device to return to the ready state. If the device  
does not return to the ready state, cancel all jobs and wait again. When the device is  
ready, resend the job. If prompted by the computer to retry the job, click Cancel.  
Check the cable connections  
If the device and computer are connected with a USB cable, the problem may be due  
to a poor cable connection.  
Make sure the cable connections at both ends are secure. If the problem persists, turn  
off the device, disconnect the cable from the device, turn on the device without  
connecting the cable, and delete any remaining jobs from the print spooler. When the  
Power light is on and not flashing, reconnect the cable.  
Check the document file  
The document file may be damaged. If you can print other documents from the same  
application, try printing a backup copy of your document, if available.  
Ink is smearing  
Check the print settings  
•
When you print documents that use much ink, allow more time to dry before  
handling the printouts. This is especially true for transparencies. In the printer  
driver, select the Best print quality, and also increase the ink drying time and  
reduce the ink saturation using the ink volume under the advanced features  
(Windows) or ink features (Mac OS). However, note that decreasing ink saturation  
might give printouts a "washed-out" quality.  
•
Color documents that have rich, blended colors can wrinkle or smear when printed  
using the Best print quality. Try using another print mode, such as Normal, to  
reduce ink, or use HP Premium Paper designed for printing vivid color documents.  
For more information, see Change print settings.  
163  
Poor print quality and unexpected printouts  
       
Chapter 10  
Check the media type  
Some types of media do not accept ink well. For these types of media, ink will dry  
more slowly and smearing may occur. For more information, see Select print media.  
Ink is not filling the text or graphics completely  
Check the media type  
Some media types are not suitable for use with the device. For more information, see  
Select print media.  
Check the printheads  
Print the print quality diagnostic page on a clean sheet of white paper. Evaluate any  
problem areas, and perform the recommended actions. For more information, see To  
print the print quality diagnostic page.  
Output is faded or dull colored  
Check the print mode  
The Draft or Fast mode in the printer driver allows you to print at a faster rate, which is  
good for printing drafts. To get better results, select Normal or Best. For more  
information, see Change print settings.  
Check the paper type setting  
When printing on transparencies or other special media, select the corresponding  
media type in the print driver. For more information, see To print on special or custom-  
sized media (Windows).  
Colors are printing as black and white  
Check the print settings  
Make sure Print in Grayscale is not selected in the printer driver.  
Wrong colors are printing  
Check the print settings  
Make sure Print in Grayscale is not selected in the printer driver.  
Check the printheads  
Print the print quality diagnostic page on a clean sheet of white paper. Evaluate any  
problem areas, and perform the recommended actions. For more information, see To  
print the print quality diagnostic page.  
164  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
               
Printout shows bleeding colors  
Check the ink cartridges  
Make sure ink cartridges have not been tampered with. Refilling processes and the  
use of incompatible inks can disrupt the intricate printing system and result in reduced  
print quality and damage to the device or printhead. HP does not guarantee or support  
refilled ink cartridges. For ordering information, see HP supplies and accessories.  
Check the printheads  
Print the print quality diagnostic page on a clean sheet of white paper. Evaluate any  
problem areas, and perform the recommended actions. For more information, see To  
print the print quality diagnostic page.  
Colors do not line up properly  
Check the printheads  
Print the print quality diagnostic page on a clean sheet of white paper. Evaluate any  
problem areas, and perform the recommended actions. For more information, see To  
print the print quality diagnostic page.  
Check the graphics placement  
Use the zoom or print preview feature of your software to check for gaps in the  
placement of graphics on the page.  
Lines or dots are missing from text or graphics  
Check the printheads  
Print the print quality diagnostic page on a clean sheet of white paper. Evaluate any  
problem areas, and perform the recommended actions. For more information, see To  
print the print quality diagnostic page.  
Solve paper-feed problems  
For information on resolving jams, see Clear a jam in the device.  
Optional Tray 2 cannot be inserted  
•
•
Reinsert the tray. Make sure it is aligned with the device opening.  
Check for a paper jam. For more information, see Clear a jam in the device.  
Another paper-feed problem is occurring  
Media is not supported for the printer or tray  
Use only media that is supported for the device and the tray being used. For more  
information, see Understand specifications for supported media.  
165  
Solve paper-feed problems  
                     
Chapter 10  
Media is not picked up from a tray  
•
Make sure media is loaded in the tray. For more information, see Load media. Fan  
the media before loading.  
•
Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct markings in the tray for the  
media size you are loading. Also make sure the guides are snug, but not tight,  
against the stack.  
•
•
Make sure media in the tray is not curled. Uncurl paper by bending it in the  
opposite direction of the curl.  
Make sure that the tray is completely loaded. If you are using special media that is  
only available in small quantities, try placing the special media on top of other  
paper of the same size to help fill the tray. (Some media is picked up more easily if  
the tray is full.)  
•
Make sure Tray 2 (optional) is inserted properly.  
Media is not coming out correctly  
•
Make sure the output tray extension is extended; otherwise, printed pages may fall  
off the device.  
•
Remove excess media from the output tray. There is a limit to the number of  
sheets the tray can hold.  
Pages are skewing  
•
Make sure the media loaded in the trays is aligned to the paper guides. If needed,  
pull out the trays from the device and reload the media properly, making sure that  
the paper guides are properly aligned.  
•
•
Make sure the rear access panel or duplexer is properly installed.  
Load media into the device only when it is not printing.  
Multiple pages are being picked up  
•
•
Fan the media before loading.  
Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct markings in the tray for the  
media size you are loading. Also make sure the guides are snug, but not tight,  
against the stack.  
•
Make sure the tray is not overloaded with paper.  
166  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
     
•
Make sure that the tray is completely loaded. If you are using special media that is  
only available in small quantities, try placing the special media on top of other  
paper of the same size to help fill the tray. (Some media is picked up more easily if  
the tray is full.)  
•
•
When reinserting Tray 2 (optional) into the device, do so gently. Forceful insertion  
with a full stack of paper may cause sheets to slide up within the device, causing  
the device to jam or pick multiple sheets at one time.  
Use HP media for optimum performance and efficiency.  
Solve copy problems  
If the following topics do not help, see Support and warranty for information about HP  
support.  
No copy came out  
•
Check the power  
Make sure that the power cord is securely connected, and the device turned on.  
•
Check the status of the device  
•
The device might be busy with another job. Check the control-panel display for  
information about the status of jobs. Wait for any job that is processing to finish.  
•
The device might be jammed. Check for jams. See Clear jams.  
•
Check the trays  
Make sure that media is loaded. See Load media for more information.  
Copies are blank  
•
Check the trays  
•
If you are copying from the ADF, make sure that the originals have been  
loaded correctly. For more information, see Load an original in the automatic  
document feeder (ADF).  
•
If you are copying from the scanner glass, make sure that the ADF is empty.  
•
•
Check the media  
The media might not meet Hewlett-Packard media specifications (for example, the  
media is too moist or too rough). See Select print media for more information.  
Check the settings  
The contrast setting might be set too light. Use the Copy button on the control  
panel to create darker copies.  
Wrong original was copied  
Check the trays  
If you are copying from the scanner glass, make sure that the ADF is empty.  
167  
Solve copy problems  
           
Chapter 10  
Documents are missing or faded  
•
Check the media  
The media might not meet Hewlett-Packard media specifications (for example, the  
media is too moist or too rough). See Select print media for more information.  
•
Check the settings  
The quality setting of Fast (which produces draft-quality copies) might be  
responsible for the missing or faded documents. Change to the Normal or Best  
setting.  
•
Check the original  
•
The accuracy of the copy depends on the quality and size of the original. Use  
the Copy menu to adjust the brightness of the copy. If the original is too light,  
the copy might not be able to compensate, even if you adjust the contrast.  
•
Colored backgrounds might cause images in the foreground to blend into the  
background, or the background might appear in a different shade.  
Size is reduced  
•
The reduce/enlarge or other copy feature might have been set from the control  
panel to reduce the scanned image. Check the settings for the copy job to make  
sure that they are for normal size.  
•
The HP photo and imaging software settings might be set to reduce the scanned  
image. Change the settings, if needed. See the onscreen Help for the HP photo  
and imaging software for more information.  
Copy quality is poor  
•
Take steps to improve the copy quality  
•
•
Use quality originals.  
Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew,  
causing unclear images. See Select print media for more information.  
•
Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.  
•
Check the device  
•
•
The ADF might not be closed properly.  
The scanner glass, ADF lid backing, or ADF window might need cleaning. See  
Clean the device for more information.  
Copy defects are apparent  
•
Vertical white or faded stripes  
The media might not meet Hewlett-Packard media specifications (for example, the  
media is too moist or too rough). See Select print media for more information.  
•
•
Too light or dark  
Try adjusting the contrast and copy-quality settings.  
Unwanted lines  
The scanner glass, ADF lid backing, or ADF frame might need cleaning. See  
Clean the device for more information.  
168  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
                   
•
•
Black dots or streaks  
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the scanner  
glass or ADF lid backing. Try cleaning the device. See Clean the device for more  
information.  
Unclear text  
•
•
Try adjusting the contrast and copy-quality settings.  
The default enhancement setting might not be suitable for the job. Check the  
setting and change it to enhance text or photographs, if needed. For more  
information, see Change the copy settings.  
•
•
Incompletely filled text or graphics  
Try adjusting the contrast and copy-quality settings.  
Copy is slanted or skewed  
•
•
Make sure that the ADF input tray is not too full.  
Make sure that the ADF width adjusters are snug against the sides of the media.  
•
•
Large, black typefaces look splotchy (not smooth)  
The default enhancement setting might not be suitable for the job. Check the  
setting and change it to enhance text or photographs, if needed. For more  
information, see Change the copy settings.  
Horizontal grainy or white bands in light-gray to medium-gray areas  
The default enhancement setting might not be suitable for the job. Check the  
setting and change it to enhance text or photographs, if needed. For more  
information, see Change the copy settings.  
Error messages appear  
“Reload document and then reload job”  
Press the OK button, and then reload the remaining documents (up to 50 pages) in  
the ADF. For more information see Load media.  
The device prints half a page, then ejects the paper  
Check the ink cartridges  
The ink cartridges may have run out of ink, and the print job was cancelled. Replace  
the ink cartridges, and then resend the print job to the device. For more information,  
see Replace the ink cartridges.  
Solve scan problems  
If the following topics do not help, see Support and warranty for information about HP  
support.  
NOTE: If you are starting the scan from a computer, see the software Help for  
troubleshooting information.  
169  
Solve scan problems  
                   
Chapter 10  
Scanner did nothing  
•
Check the original  
Make sure that the original is loaded correctly. For more information, see Load an  
original on the scanner glass.  
•
Check the device  
The device might be coming out of PowerSave mode after a period of inactivity,  
which delays processing a short while. Wait until the device reaches the READY  
state.  
Scan takes too long  
•
Check the settings  
•
If you set the resolution too high, the scan job takes longer and results in larger  
files. To obtain good results when scanning or copying, do not use a resolution  
that is higher than needed. You can lower the resolution to scan more quickly.  
•
If you acquire an image through TWAIN, you can change the settings so that  
the original scans in black and white. See the onscreen Help for the TWAIN  
program for information.  
•
Check the status of the device  
If you sent a print or copy job before you tried to scan, the scan starts if the  
scanner is not busy. However, the printing and scanning processes share memory,  
which means that the scan might be slower.  
Part of the document did not scan or text is missing  
•
Check the original  
•
Make sure that you loaded the original correctly. For more information, see  
Load the originals.  
•
If you scanned the document from the ADF, try scanning the document directly  
from the scanner glass. For more information, see Load an original on the  
scanner glass.  
•
Colored backgrounds can cause images in the foreground to blend into the  
background. Try adjusting the settings before you scan the original, or try  
enhancing the image after you scan the original.  
•
Check the settings  
•
Make sure that the input media size is large enough for the original that you  
are scanning.  
•
If you are using the HP photo and imaging software, the default settings in the  
HP photo and imaging software might be set to automatically perform a  
specific task other than the one that you are attempting. See the onscreen  
Help for the HP photo and imaging software for instructions about changing the  
properties.  
170  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
         
Text cannot be edited  
•
Check the settings  
•
•
Make sure that the OCR software is set to edit text.  
When you scan the original, make sure that you select a document type that  
creates editable text. If text is classified as a graphic, it is not converted to text.  
•
Your OCR program might be linked to a word-processing program that does  
not perform OCR tasks. See the product software Help for more information  
about linking programs.  
•
Check the originals  
•
•
•
•
For OCR, the original must be loaded into the ADF with the top forward and  
face-up. Make sure that you loaded the original correctly. For more information,  
see Load the originals.  
The OCR program might not recognize text that is tightly spaced. For example,  
if the text that the OCR program converts has missing or combined characters,  
"rn" might appear as "m."  
The accuracy of the OCR program depends on the image quality, text size,  
and structure of the original and the quality of the scan itself. Make sure that  
your original has good image quality.  
Colored backgrounds can cause images in the foreground to blend too much.  
Try adjusting the settings before you scan the original, or try enhancing the  
image after you scan the original. If you are performing an OCR operation on  
an original, any colored text on the original does not scan well, if at all.  
Error messages appear  
•
"Unable to activate TWAIN source" or "An error occurred while acquiring the  
image"  
•
If you are acquiring an image from another device, such as a digital camera or  
another scanner, make sure that the other device is TWAIN-compliant. Devices  
that are not TWAIN-compliant do not work with the device software.  
•
•
Make sure that you have connected the USB Device Cable to the correct port  
on the back of your computer.  
Verify that the correct TWAIN source is selected. In the software, check the  
TWAIN source by selecting Select Scanner on the File menu.  
•
“Reload document and then restart job”  
Press the OK button, and then reload the remaining documents (up to 50 pages)  
in the ADF. For more information see Load media.  
Scanned image quality is poor  
The original is a second-generation photo or picture  
Reprinted photographs, such as those in newspapers or magazines, are printed by  
using tiny dots of ink that make an interpretation of the original photograph, which  
degrades the quality. Often, the ink dots form unwanted patterns that can be detected  
when the image is scanned or printed or when the image appears on a screen. If the  
171  
Solve scan problems  
           
Chapter 10  
following suggestions do not solve the problem, you might need to use a better-quality  
version of the original.  
•
•
•
•
•
To eliminate the patterns, try reducing the size of the image after scanning.  
Print the scanned image to see if the quality is better.  
Make sure that the resolution and color settings are correct for the type of scan job.  
For best results, use the flatbed scanner for scanning rather than the ADF.  
Text or images on the back of a two-sided original appear in the scan  
Two-sided originals can "bleed" text or images from the back side to the scan if the  
originals are printed on media that is too thin or too transparent.  
•
The image quality is better when printed  
The image that appears on the screen is not always an accurate representation of  
the quality of the scan.  
•
Try adjusting your computer monitor settings to use more colors (or levels of  
gray). On Windows computers, you typically make this adjustment by opening  
Display on the Windows control panel.  
•
Try adjusting the resolution and color settings.  
•
•
The scanned image is skewed (crooked)  
The original might have been loaded incorrectly. Be sure to use the media guides  
when you load the originals into the ADF. For more information, see Load the  
originals.  
The scanned image shows blots, lines, vertical white stripes, or other defects  
•
If the scanner glass is dirty, the image produced does not have optimum  
clarity. See Clean the device for cleaning instructions.  
•
The defects might be on the original and not a result of the scanning process.  
•
•
Graphics look different from the original  
The graphics settings might not be suitable for the type of scan job that you are  
performing. Try changing the graphics settings.  
Take steps to improve the scan quality  
•
•
•
Use the flatbed scanner to scan rather than the ADF.  
Use high-quality originals.  
Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew,  
which causes unclear images. For more information, see Load the originals.  
•
Adjust the software settings according to how you plan to use the scanned  
page.  
•
•
Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.  
Clean the scanner glass. See Clean the scanner glass for more information.  
172  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
     
Scan defects are apparent  
•
Blank pages  
•
The original might have been loaded upside down. Make sure that you loaded  
the original correctly. For more information, see Load the originals.  
•
If you are producing blank pages when you scan from the flatbed scanner,  
make sure that the original document is loaded correctly. Place the original  
document face down on the flatbed scanner with the top-left corner of the  
document located in the lower-right corner of the scanner glass. Also, make  
sure that the ADF is empty.  
•
Too light or dark  
•
Try adjusting the settings. Be sure to use the correct resolution and color  
settings.  
•
The original image might be very light or dark or might be printed on colored  
paper.  
•
•
Unwanted lines  
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the scanner  
glass. Try cleaning the scanner glass. See Clean the device for more information.  
Black dots or streaks  
•
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the scanner  
glass, the scanner glass might be dirty or scratched, or the ADF lid backing  
might be dirty. Try cleaning the scanner glass and lid backing. See Clean the  
device for more information. If cleaning does not correct the problem, the  
scanner glass or ADF lid backing might need to be replaced.  
•
The defects might be on the original and not a result of the scanning process.  
•
•
Unclear text  
Try adjusting the settings. Make sure that the resolution and color settings are  
correct.  
Size is reduced  
The HP software settings might be set to reduce the scanned image. See the  
product software Help for more information about changing the settings.  
Unable to scan to network folder (Direct Digital Filing)  
NOTE: The Direct Digital Filing feature does not support Windows Active Directory.  
•
•
The device is not set up correctly on the network  
Make sure that the device is set up properly and connected to the network. PING  
the device and make sure that it is responding.  
The network folder has not been set up correctly  
•
•
•
Make sure the folder is created on the server. For more information, see the  
documentation available for your operating system.  
Make sure the folder name uses only the letters A through Z (uppercase or  
lowercase) and the numbers 1 through 9.  
Some common punctuation marks are also supported. However, do not use  
accented or special characters in the folder name.  
173  
Solve scan problems  
                 
Chapter 10  
•
•
Make sure the folder has been shared and that users can both read and write  
to the folder. For more information, see the documentation available for your  
operating system.  
Make sure the folder name is entered in the correct format in the EWS and that  
the username and password are entered correctly. For more information, see  
the information in the EWS.  
•
•
The disk is full  
Make sure the server containing the folder has enough disk space available.  
The device cannot create a unique filename using the assigned prefix and  
suffix  
The device can create up to 9,999 files using the same prefix and suffix. If you  
have scanned many files to a folder, change the prefix.  
•
•
The filename prefix has not been set up correctly  
Make sure the folder name and filename prefix uses only the letters A through Z,  
uppercase or lowercase; the numbers 1 through 9. Some common punctuation  
marks are also supported. However, do not use accented or special characters in  
the folder name. If unsupported characters are used in filename prefixes, they will  
not appear correctly when the file is created.  
The server name cannot be resolved  
Sending to network folder might fail if the server name provided during setup  
cannot be resolved to specific IP addresses. When setting up the Direct Digital  
Filing feature, be sure to do the following:  
•
•
Try to use fully qualified DNS names.  
Make sure the DNS server is set up correctly on the device.  
•
TIP: If you have recently changed the DNS settings, turn off and then turn  
on the all-in-one.  
Solve fax problems  
This section contains fax setup troubleshooting information for the device. If the device  
is not set up properly for faxing, you might experience problems when sending faxes,  
receiving faxes, or both.  
If you are having faxing problems, you can print a fax test report to check the status of  
the device. The test will fail if the device is not set up properly for faxing. Perform this  
test after you have completed setting up the device for faxing. For more information,  
see Test fax setup.  
If the test fails, review the report for information on how to fix any problems found. For  
more information, see The fax test failed.  
The fax test failed  
If you ran a fax test and the test failed, review the report for basic information about  
the error. For more detailed information, check the report to see which part of the test  
failed, and then review the appropriate topic in this section for solutions to try.  
•
•
The "Fax Hardware Test" failed  
The "Fax Connected to Active Telephone Wall Jack" test failed  
174  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
       
•
•
•
•
The "Phone Cord Connected to Correct Port on Fax" test failed  
The "Using Correct Type of Phone Cord with Fax" test failed  
The "Dial Tone Detection" test failed  
The "Fax Line Condition" test failed  
The "Fax Hardware Test" failed  
Solution:  
•
Turn off the device by using the Power button located on the control panel and  
then unplug the power cord from the back of the device. After a few seconds,  
plug the power cord in again, and then turn the power on. Run the test again. If  
the test fails again, continue reviewing the troubleshooting information in this  
section.  
•
•
Try to send or receive a test fax. If you can send or receive a fax successfully,  
there might not be a problem.  
If you are running the test from the Fax Setup Wizard (Windows) or HP Fax  
Setup Utility (Mac OS), make sure the device is not busy completing another  
task, such as receiving a fax or making a copy. Check the display for a  
message indicating that the device is busy. If it is busy, wait until it is finished  
and in the idle state before running the test.  
•
•
Make sure you use the phone cord that came with the device. If you do not use  
the supplied phone cord to connect from the telephone wall jack to the device,  
you might not be able to send or receive faxes. After you plug in the phone  
cord that came with the device, run the fax test again.  
If you are using a phone splitter, this can cause faxing problems. (A splitter is a  
two-cord connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack.) Try removing the  
splitter and connecting the device directly to the telephone wall jack.  
After you resolve any problems found, run the fax test again to make sure it  
passes and the device is ready for faxing. If the Fax Hardware Test continues to  
fail and you experience problems faxing, contact HP Support. Go to www.hp.com/  
support. If prompted, choose your country/region, and then click Contact HP for  
information on calling for technical support.  
The "Fax Connected to Active Telephone Wall Jack" test failed  
Solution:  
•
Check the connection between the telephone wall jack and the device to make  
sure the phone cord is secure.  
•
Make sure you use the phone cord that came with the device. If you do not use  
the supplied phone cord to connect from the telephone wall jack to the device,  
you might not be able to send or receive faxes. After you plug in the phone  
cord that came with the device, run the fax test again.  
175  
Solve fax problems  
       
Chapter 10  
•
Make sure you have correctly connected the device to the telephone wall jack.  
Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to  
your telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE  
on the back of the device. For more information on setting up the device for  
faxing, see Set up faxing for the device (some models only).  
•
•
•
If you are using a phone splitter, this can cause faxing problems. (A splitter is a  
two-cord connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack.) Try removing the  
splitter and connecting the device directly to the telephone wall jack.  
Try connecting a working phone and phone cord to the telephone wall jack that  
you are using for the device and check for a dial tone. If you do not hear a dial  
tone, contact your telephone company and have them check the line.  
Try to send or receive a test fax. If you can send or receive a fax successfully,  
there might not be a problem.  
After you resolve any problems found, run the fax test again to make sure it  
passes and the device is ready for faxing.  
The "Phone Cord Connected to Correct Port on Fax" test failed  
Solution: Plug the phone cord into the correct port.  
1. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to  
your telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE  
on the back of the device.  
NOTE: If you use the 2-EXT port to connect to the telephone wall jack,  
you will not be able to send or receive faxes. The 2-EXT port should only  
be used to connect other equipment, such as an answering machine or a  
telephone.  
Figure 10-1 Back view of the device  
1
Telephone wall jack  
2
Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to connect to the "1-LINE"  
port  
176  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
   
2. After you have connected the phone cord to the port labeled 1-LINE, run the  
fax test again to make sure it passes and the device is ready for faxing.  
3. Try to send or receive a test fax.  
•
Make sure you use the phone cord that came with the device. If you do not use  
the supplied phone cord to connect from the telephone wall jack to the device,  
you might not be able to send or receive faxes. After you plug in the phone  
cord that came with the device, run the fax test again.  
•
If you are using a phone splitter, this can cause faxing problems. (A splitter is a  
two-cord connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack.) Try removing the  
splitter and connecting the device directly to the telephone wall jack.  
The "Using Correct Type of Phone Cord with Fax" test failed  
Solution:  
•
Make sure you used the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to  
connect to the telephone wall jack. One end of the phone cord should be  
connected to the port labeled 1-LINE on the back of the device, and the other  
end to your telephone wall jack, as shown below.  
1
2
Telephone wall jack  
Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to connect to the "1-LINE"  
port  
If the phone cord that came with the device is not long enough, you can use a  
coupler to extend the length. You can purchase a coupler at an electronics  
store that carries phone accessories. You will also need another phone cord,  
which can be a standard phone cord that you might already have in your home  
or office.  
•
Check the connection between the telephone wall jack and the device to make  
sure the phone cord is secure.  
177  
Solve fax problems  
   
Chapter 10  
•
•
Make sure you use the phone cord that came with the device. If you do not use  
the supplied phone cord to connect from the telephone wall jack to the device,  
you might not be able to send or receive faxes. After you plug in the phone  
cord that came with the device, run the fax test again.  
If you are using a phone splitter, this can cause faxing problems. (A splitter is a  
two-cord connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack.) Try removing the  
splitter and connecting the device directly to the telephone wall jack.  
The "Dial Tone Detection" test failed  
Solution:  
•
Other equipment, which uses the same phone line as the device, might be  
causing the test to fail. To find out if other equipment is causing a problem,  
disconnect everything from the phone line, and then run the test again. If the  
Dial Tone Detection Test passes without the other equipment, then one or  
more pieces of the equipment is causing problems; try adding them back one  
at a time and rerunning the test each time, until you identify which piece of  
equipment is causing the problem.  
•
•
Try connecting a working phone and phone cord to the telephone wall jack that  
you are using for the device and check for a dial tone. If you do not hear a dial  
tone, contact your telephone company and have them check the line.  
Make sure you have correctly connected the device to the telephone wall jack.  
Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to  
your telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE  
on the back of the device.  
•
•
•
•
If you are using a phone splitter, this can cause faxing problems. (A splitter is a  
two-cord connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack.) Try removing the  
splitter and connecting the device directly to the telephone wall jack.  
If your telephone system is not using a standard dial tone, such as some PBX  
systems, this might cause the test to fail. This will not cause a problem sending  
or receiving faxes. Try sending or receiving a test fax.  
Check to make sure the country/region setting is set appropriately for your  
country/region. If the country/region setting is not set or is set incorrectly, the  
test might fail and you might have problems sending and receiving faxes.  
Make sure you connect the device to an analog phone line or you will not be  
able to send or receive faxes. To check if your phone line is digital, connect a  
regular analog phone to the line and listen for a dial tone. If you do not hear a  
normal sounding dial tone, it might be a phone line set up for digital phones.  
Connect the device to an analog phone line and try sending or receiving a fax.  
•
Make sure you use the phone cord that came with the device. If you do not use  
the supplied phone cord to connect from the telephone wall jack to the device,  
you might not be able to send or receive faxes. After you plug in the phone  
cord that came with the device, run the fax test again.  
After you resolve any problems found, run the fax test again to make sure it  
passes and the device is ready for faxing. If the Dial Tone Detection test  
178  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
   
continues to fail, contact your telephone company and have them check the phone  
line.  
The "Fax Line Condition" test failed  
Solution:  
•
Make sure you connect the device to an analog phone line or you will not be  
able to send or receive faxes. To check if your phone line is digital, connect a  
regular analog phone to the line and listen for a dial tone. If you do not hear a  
normal sounding dial tone, it might be a phone line set up for digital phones.  
Connect the device to an analog phone line and try sending or receiving a fax.  
•
•
Check the connection between the telephone wall jack and the device to make  
sure the phone cord is secure.  
Make sure you have correctly connected the device to the telephone wall jack.  
Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to  
your telephone wall jack, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE  
on the back of the device.  
•
Other equipment, which uses the same phone line as the device, might be  
causing the test to fail. To find out if other equipment is causing a problem,  
disconnect everything from the phone line, and then run the test again.  
•
If the Fax Line Condition Test passes without the other equipment, then  
one or more pieces of the equipment is causing problems; try adding them  
back one at a time and rerunning the test each time, until you identify which  
piece of equipment is causing the problem.  
•
If the Fax Line Condition Test fails without the other equipment, connect  
the device to a working phone line and continue reviewing the  
troubleshooting information in this section.  
•
•
If you are using a phone splitter, this can cause faxing problems. (A splitter is a  
two-cord connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack.) Try removing the  
splitter and connecting the device directly to the telephone wall jack.  
Make sure you use the phone cord that came with the device. If you do not use  
the supplied phone cord to connect from the telephone wall jack to the device,  
you might not be able to send or receive faxes. After you plug in the phone  
cord that came with the device, run the fax test again.  
After you resolve any problems found, run the fax test again to make sure it  
passes and the device is ready for faxing. If the Fax Line Condition test continues  
to fail and you experience problems faxing, contact your telephone company and  
have them check the phone line.  
The display always shows Phone Off Hook  
Solution: You are using the wrong type of phone cord. Make sure you are using  
the phone cord that came with the device to connect the device to your phone line.  
If the phone cord that came with the device is not long enough, you can use a  
coupler to extend the length. You can purchase a coupler at an electronics store  
179  
Solve fax problems  
   
Chapter 10  
that carries phone accessories. You will also need another phone cord, which can  
be a standard phone cord that you might already have in your home or office.  
Solution: Other equipment that uses the same phone line as the device might be  
in use. Make sure extension phones (phones on the same phone line, but not  
connected to the device) or other equipment are not in use or off the hook. For  
example, you cannot use the device for faxing if an extension phone is off the  
hook, or if you are using a computer dial-up modem to send e-mail or access the  
Internet.  
The device is having problems sending and receiving faxes  
Solution: Make sure the device is turned on. Look at the display on the device. If  
the display is blank and the Power light is not lit, the device is turned off. Make  
sure the power cord is firmly connected to the device and plugged into a power  
outlet. Press the Power button to turn on the device.  
After turning on the device, HP recommends you wait five minutes before sending  
or receiving a fax. The device cannot send or receive faxes while it is initializing  
after being turned on.  
Solution:  
•
Make sure you used the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to  
connect to the telephone wall jack. One end of the phone cord should be  
connected to the port labeled 1-LINE on the back of the device and the other  
end to your telephone wall jack, as shown below.  
1
2
Telephone wall jack  
Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to connect to the "1-LINE"  
port  
If the phone cord that came with the device is not long enough, you can use a  
coupler to extend the length. You can purchase a coupler at an electronics  
store that carries phone accessories. You will also need another phone cord,  
180  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
 
which can be a standard phone cord that you might already have in your home  
or office..  
•
•
Try connecting a working phone and phone cord to the telephone wall jack that  
you are using for the device and check for a dial tone. If you do not hear a dial  
tone, call your local telephone company for service.  
Other equipment, which uses the same phone line as the device, might be in  
use. For example, you cannot use the device for faxing if an extension phone  
is off the hook, or if you are using a computer dial-up modem to send an e-mail  
or access the Internet.  
•
•
Check to see if another process has caused an error. Check the display or  
your computer for an error message providing information about the problem  
and how to solve it. If there is an error, the device will not send or receive a fax  
until the error condition is resolved.  
The phone line connection might be noisy. Phone lines with poor sound quality  
(noise) can cause faxing problems. Check the sound quality of the phone line  
by plugging a phone into the telephone wall jack and listening for static or other  
noise. If you hear noise, turn Error Correction Mode (ECM) off and try faxing  
again. For information about changing ECM, see the onscreen Help. If the  
problem persists, contact your telephone company.  
•
•
If you are using a digital subscriber line (DSL) service, make sure that you  
have a DSL filter connected or you will not be able to fax successfully. For  
more information, see Case B: Set up the device with DSL.  
Make sure the device is not connected to a telephone wall jack that is set up  
for digital phones. To check if your phone line is digital, connect a regular  
analog phone to the line and listen for a dial tone. If you do not hear a normal  
sounding dial tone, it might be a phone line set up for digital phones.  
•
•
If you are using either a private branch exchange (PBX) or an integrated  
services digital network (ISDN) converter/terminal adapter, make sure the  
device is connected to the correct port and the terminal adapter is set to the  
correct switch type for your country/region, if possible. For more information,  
see Case C: Set up the device with a PBX phone system or an ISDN line.  
If the device shares the same phone line with a DSL service, the DSL modem  
might not be properly grounded. If the DSL modem is not properly grounded, it  
can create noise on the phone line. Phone lines with poor sound quality (noise)  
can cause faxing problems. You can check the sound quality of the phone line  
by plugging a phone into the telephone wall jack and listening for static or other  
noise. If you hear noise, turn off your DSL modem and completely remove  
power for at least 15 minutes. Turn the DSL modem back on and listen to the  
dial tone again.  
NOTE: You might notice static on the phone line again in the future. If the  
device stops sending and receiving faxes, repeat this process.  
If the phone line is still noisy, contact your telephone company. For information  
on turning your DSL modem off, contact your DSL provider for support.  
•
If you are using a phone splitter, this can cause faxing problems. (A splitter is a  
two-cord connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack.) Try removing the  
splitter and connecting the device directly to the telephone wall jack.  
181  
Solve fax problems  
Chapter 10  
The device is having problems sending a manual fax  
Solution:  
NOTE: This possible solution applies only in the countries/regions that  
receive a 2-wire phone cord in the box with the device, including: Argentina,  
Australia, Brazil, Canada, Chile, China, Colombia, Greece, India, Indonesia,  
Ireland, Japan, Korea, Latin America, Malaysia, Mexico, Philippines, Poland,  
Portugal, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Singapore, Spain, Taiwan, Thailand, USA,  
Venezuela, and Vietnam.  
•
Make sure the telephone you use to initiate the fax call is connected directly to  
the device. To send a fax manually, the telephone must be connected directly  
to the port labeled 2-EXT on the device, as shown below.  
1
2
Telephone wall jack  
Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the device to connect to the "1-LINE"  
port  
3
Telephone  
•
If you are sending a fax manually from your phone that is connected directly to  
the device, you must use the keypad on the telephone to send the fax. You  
cannot use the keypad on the control panel of the device.  
NOTE: If using a serial-type phone system, please connect your phone  
directly on top of the device cable which has a wall plug attached to it.  
The device cannot receive faxes, but can send faxes  
Solution:  
•
If you are not using a distinctive ring service, check to make sure that the  
Distinctive Ring feature on the device is set to All Rings. For more  
information, see Change the answer ring pattern for distinctive ring.  
•
If Auto Answer is set to Off, you will need to receive faxes manually;  
otherwise, the device will not receive the fax. For information on receiving  
faxes manually, see Receive a fax manually.  
182  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
   
•
If you have a voice mail service at the same phone number you use for fax  
calls, you must receive faxes manually, not automatically. This means that you  
must be available to respond in person to incoming fax calls. For information  
on setting up the device when you have a voice mail service, see Case F:  
Shared voice/fax line with voice mail. For information on receiving faxes  
manually, see Receive a fax manually.  
•
•
If you have a computer dial-up modem on the same phone line with the device,  
check to make sure that the software that came with your modem is not set to  
receive faxes automatically. Modems that are set up to receive faxes  
automatically take over the phone line to receive all incoming faxes, which  
prevents the device from receiving fax calls.  
If you have an answering machine on the same phone line with the device, you  
might have one of the following problems:  
•
•
Your answering machine might not be set up properly with the device.  
Your outgoing message might be too long or too loud to allow the device to  
detect fax tones, and the sending fax machine might disconnect.  
•
Your answering machine might not have enough quiet time after your  
outgoing message to allow the device to detect fax tones. This problem is  
most common with digital answering machines.  
The following actions might help solve these problems:  
•
When you have an answering machine on the same phone line you use for  
fax calls, try connecting the answering machine directly to the device as  
described in Case I: Shared voice/fax line with answering machine.  
•
•
Make sure the device is set to receive faxes automatically. For information  
on setting up the device to receive faxes automatically, see Receive a fax.  
Make sure the Rings to Answer setting is set to a greater number of rings  
than the answering machine. For more information, see Set the number of  
rings before answering.  
•
•
Disconnect the answering machine and then try receiving a fax. If faxing is  
successful without the answering machine, the answering machine might  
be causing the problem.  
Reconnect the answering machine and record your outgoing message  
again. Record a message that is approximately 10 seconds in duration.  
Speak slowly and at a low volume when recording your message. Leave at  
least 5 seconds of silence at the end of the voice message. There should  
be no background noise when recording this silent time. Try to receive a  
fax again.  
NOTE: Some digital answering machines might not retain the  
recorded silence at the end of your outgoing message. Play back your  
outgoing message to check.  
183  
Solve fax problems  
Chapter 10  
•
If the device shares the same phone line with other types of phone equipment,  
such as an answering machine, a computer dial-up modem, or a multi-port  
switch box, the fax signal level might be reduced. The signal level can also be  
reduced if you use a splitter or connect extra cables to extend the length of  
your phone. A reduced fax signal can cause problems during fax reception.  
To find out if other equipment is causing a problem, disconnect everything  
except the device from the phone line, and then try to receive a fax. If you can  
receive faxes successfully without the other equipment, one or more pieces of  
the other equipment is causing problems; try adding them back one at a time  
and receiving a fax each time, until you identify which equipment is causing the  
problem.  
•
If you have a special ring pattern for your fax phone number (using a distinctive  
ring service through your telephone company), make sure that the Distinctive  
Ring feature on the device is set to match. For more information, see Change  
the answer ring pattern for distinctive ring.  
The device cannot send faxes, but can receive faxes  
Solution:  
•
The device might be dialing too fast or too soon. You might need to insert  
some pauses in the number sequence. For example, if you need to access an  
outside line before dialing the phone number, insert a pause following the  
access number. If your number is 95555555, and 9 accesses an outside line,  
you might insert pauses as follows: 9-555-5555. To enter a pause in the fax  
number you are typing, press Redial/Pause, or press the Space (#) button  
repeatedly, until a dash (-) appears on the display.  
You can also send the fax using monitor dialing. This enables you to listen to  
the phone line as you dial. You can set the pace of your dialing and respond to  
prompts as you dial. For more information, see Send a fax using monitor dialing.  
•
The number you entered when sending the fax is not in the proper format or  
the receiving fax machine is having problems. To check this, try calling the fax  
number from a telephone and listen for fax tones. If you cannot hear fax tones,  
the receiving fax machine might not be turned on or connected, or a voice mail  
service could be interfering with the recipient's phone line. You can also ask  
the recipient to check the receiving fax machine for any problems.  
184  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
 
Fax tones are recorded on my answering machine  
Solution:  
•
When you have an answering machine on the same phone line you use for fax  
calls, try connecting the answering machine directly to the device as described  
in Case I: Shared voice/fax line with answering machine. If you do not connect  
the answering machine as recommended, fax tones might be recorded on your  
answering machine.  
•
Make sure the device is set to receive faxes automatically and that the Rings  
to Answer setting is correct. The number of rings to answer for the device  
should be greater than the number of rings to answer for the answering  
machine. If the answering machine and the device are set to the same number  
of rings to answer, both devices answer the call and fax tones are recorded on  
the answering machine.  
•
Set your answering machine to a low number of rings and the device to answer  
in the maximum number of rings supported. (The maximum number of rings  
varies by country/region.) In this setup, the answering machine answers the  
call and the device monitors the line. If the device detects fax tones, the device  
receives the fax. If the call is a voice call, the answering machine records the  
incoming message. For more information, see Set the number of rings before  
answering.  
The phone cord that came with my device is not long enough  
Solution: If the phone cord that came with the device is not long enough, you  
can use a coupler to extend the length. You can purchase a coupler at an  
electronics store that carries phone accessories. You will also need another phone  
cord, which can be a standard phone cord that you might already have in your  
home or office.  
TIP: If the device came with a 2-wire phone cord adaptor, you can use it with  
a 4-wire phone cord to extend the length. For information on using the 2-wire  
phone cord adaptor, see the documentation that came with it.  
To extend your phone cord  
1. Using the phone cord supplied in the box with the device, connect one end to  
the coupler, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the back  
of the device.  
2. Connect another phone cord to the open port on the coupler and to the  
telephone wall jack.  
Solve photo (memory card) problems  
If the following topics do not help, see Support and warranty for information about HP  
support.  
Solve photo (memory card) problems  
185  
     
Chapter 10  
NOTE: If you are starting a memory card operation from a computer, see the  
software Help for troubleshooting information.  
The device cannot read the memory card  
•
Check the memory card  
•
Make sure that the memory card is one of the supported types. For Compact  
Flash II - solid state memory only. For more information, see Insert a memory  
card.  
•
•
Some memory cards have a switch that controls how they can be used. Make  
sure that the switch is set so that the memory card can be read.  
Inspect the ends of the memory card for dirt or material that closes a hole or  
spoils a metal contact. Clean the contacts with a lint-free cloth and small  
amounts of isopropyl alcohol.  
•
Assure that the memory card is working properly by testing it with other devices.  
•
Check the memory card slot  
•
Make sure that the memory card is fully inserted into the correct slot. For more  
information, see Insert a memory card.  
•
Remove the memory card (when the light is not blinking) and shine a flashlight  
into the empty slot. See if any of the small pins inside are bent. When the  
computer is off, you can straighten slightly bent pins by using the tip of a thin,  
retracted ballpoint pen. If a pin has bent in such a way that it touches another  
pin, replace the memory card reader or have the device serviced. For more  
information, see Support and warranty.  
•
Make sure that only one memory card has been inserted at a time in the slots.  
An error message should appear on the control-panel display if more than one  
memory card is inserted.  
The device cannot read photos on the memory card  
Check the memory card  
•
•
The memory card might be corrupt.  
The photos might be in a format that is not recognized. An error message should  
appear on the control-panel display if the format is unrecognizable. Use the  
procedure for printing photos from the control panel, because more formats might  
be recognized. For more information, see Print photos from the control panel. If the  
device is connected to a computer, you can save the photos from the memory card  
to your computer and then print them from a software program.  
Some photos on the memory card will not print, causing the print job to cancel  
Check the photo files  
Print a proof sheet and note which photos are corrupt. Set up the print job so that it  
does not include the corrupted photos. For more information, see Print photos using a  
proof sheet.  
186  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
         
The device prints half a page, then ejects the paper  
Check the ink cartridges  
The ink cartridges may have run out of ink, and the print job was cancelled. Replace  
the ink cartridges, and then resend the print job to the device. For more information,  
see Replace the ink cartridges.  
Solve device management problems  
This section provide solutions to common problems that involve managing the device.  
This section contains the following topic:  
Embedded Web server cannot be opened  
Embedded Web server cannot be opened  
Check your network setup  
•
Make sure you are not using a phone cord or a cross cable to connect the device  
to the network. For more information, see Configure the device (Windows) or  
Configure the device (Mac OS).  
•
•
Make sure the network cable is securely connected to the device.  
Make sure the network hub, switch, or router is turned on and working properly.  
Check the computer  
Make sure the computer that you are using is connected to the network.  
Check your Web browser  
Make sure the Web browser meets the minimum system requirements. For more  
information, see System requirements.  
Check the device IP address  
•
To check the IP address of the device from the control panel (color display models  
only), press the Setup button, select Network, select View Network Settings,  
and then select either Display Wired Summary or Display Wireless Summary.  
For devices with a two-line display, the user must obtain the IP address by printing  
a network configuration page. Press the Setup button, select Network, select  
Network Settings, and then select Print Network Configuration Page.  
•
Ping the device using the IP address from the command prompt.  
For example, if the IP address is 123.123.123.123, type the following at the MS-  
DOS prompt:  
C:\Ping 123.123.123.123  
If a reply appears, the IP address is correct. If a time-out response appears, the IP  
address is incorrect.  
Solve device management problems  
187  
         
Chapter 10  
Troubleshoot installation issues  
If the following topics do not help, see Support and warranty for information about HP  
support.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hardware installation suggestions  
Software installation suggestions  
Solve alignment page problems  
Solve software installation problems  
Solve network problems  
Solve wireless problems  
Hardware installation suggestions  
Check the device  
•
Make sure that all packing tape and material have been removed from outside and  
inside the device.  
•
•
Make sure that the device is loaded with paper.  
Make sure that no lights are on or blinking except the Ready light, which should be  
on. If the Attention light is blinking, check for messages on the control panel.  
•
Make sure that the device can print a self-test diagnostic page.  
Check the hardware connections  
•
•
Make sure that any cords and cables that you are using are in good working order.  
Make sure that the power cord is connected securely to both the device and to a  
working power outlet.  
•
Make sure that the phone cord is connected to the 1-LINE port.  
Check the printheads and ink cartridges  
•
•
Make sure that you have removed the orange caps from the printheads.  
Make sure that all of the printheads and ink cartridges are firmly installed in their  
correct, colorcoded slot. Press down firmly on each one to ensure proper contact.  
The device cannot work if they are not all installed.  
•
•
Make sure that the printhead latch is closed properly.  
If the display shows a printhead error message, clean the contacts on the  
printheads.  
Software installation suggestions  
Check the computer system  
•
•
Make sure that your computer is running one of the supported operating systems.  
Make sure that the computer meets at least the minimum system requirements.  
188  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
       
Verify installation preliminaries  
•
Make sure to use the Starter CD that contains the correct installation software for  
your operating system.  
•
•
Before installing software, make sure that all other programs are closed.  
If the computer does not recognize the path to the CD-ROM drive that you type,  
make sure that you are specifying the correct drive letter.  
•
If the computer cannot recognize the Starter CD in the CD-ROM drive, inspect the  
Starter CD for damage. You can download the device driver from the HP Web site  
(www.hp.com/support).  
Solve alignment page problems  
Check the device to ensure the following:  
•
•
•
Power light is on and not blinking. When the device is first turned on, it takes  
approximately 45 seconds to warm up.  
The device is in the Ready state, and no other lights on the control panel are lit or  
blinking. If lights are lit or blinking, see the message on the control panel.  
Ensure power cord and other cables are working, and are firmly connected to the  
device.  
•
•
•
•
•
All packing tapes and materials are removed from the device.  
Rear access panel or duplexer is locked into place.  
Paper is loaded correctly in the tray, and is not jammed in the device.  
Ensure the orange protective caps have been removed from each printhead.  
Printheads and ink cartridges are properly installed in their correct color-coded  
slots. Press down firmly on each one to ensure proper contact.  
•
Printhead latch and all covers are closed.  
Solve software installation problems  
Check or perform the following:  
•
•
Make sure the computer meets the system requirements.  
Before installing software on a Windows computer, ensure all other programs are  
closed.  
•
•
If the computer does not recognize the path to the CD drive that you typed, ensure  
you are specifying the correct drive letter.  
If the computer cannot recognize the Starter CD in the CD drive, inspect the CD for  
damage. You can download the device driver from the HP Web site (www.hp.com/  
support).  
•
•
In the Windows device manager, make sure that the USB drivers have not been  
disabled.  
If you are using a computer running Windows, and the computer cannot detect the  
device, run the uninstallation utility (util\ccc\uninstall.bat on the Starter CD) to  
perform a clean uninstallation of the device driver. Restart your computer, and  
reinstall the device driver.  
189  
Troubleshoot installation issues  
   
Chapter 10  
Solve network problems  
NOTE: After correcting any of the following, run the installation program again.  
General network troubleshooting  
• If you are unable to install the device software, verify that:  
•
•
•
All cable connections to the computer and the device are secure.  
The network is operational and the network hub is turned on.  
All applications, including virus protection programs, spyware protection  
programs, and firewalls, are closed or disabled for computers running Windows.  
•
•
Make sure the device is installed on the same subnet as the computers that  
will be using the device.  
If the installation program cannot discover the device, print the network  
configuration page, and enter the IP address manually in the installation  
program. For more information, see Understand the network configuration page  
•
If you are using a computer running Windows, make sure that the network ports  
created in the device driver match the device IP address:  
•
•
Print the device’s network configuration page.  
Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes.  
- Or -  
Click Start, click Control Panel, and then double-click Printers.  
Right-click the device icon, click Properties, and then click the Ports tab.  
Select the TCP/IP port for the device, and then click Configure Port.  
•
•
•
Compare the IP address listed in the dialog box and make sure it matches the  
IP address listed on the network configuration page. If the IP addresses are  
different, change the IP address in the dialog box to match the address on the  
network configuration page.  
•
Click OK twice to save the settings and close the dialog boxes.  
Problems connecting to a wired network  
•
If the Link light on the network connector does not turn on, make sure that all of  
the “General network troubleshooting” conditions are met.  
•
Though it is not recommended that you assign the device with a static IP address,  
you might resolve some installation problems (such as a conflict with a personal  
firewall) by doing so.  
190  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
 
Solve wireless problems  
If the device is unable to communicate with the network after completing the wireless  
setup and software installation, perform one or more of the following tasks.  
Check the wireless communication settings  
•
•
Make sure the computer’s wireless card is set to the correct wireless profile. A  
wireless profile is a set of network settings unique to a given network. A single  
wireless card might have several wireless profiles (for example, one for a home  
network and one for an office network). Open the Configuration utility for the  
network card installed on your computer, and ensure that the profile selected is the  
profile for the device’s network.  
Make sure the device’s network settings match those of your network. Do one of  
the following to find the settings for your network:  
•
Infrastructure communication: Open the wireless access point’s (WAP)  
Configuration utility.  
•
Ad hoc communication: Open the Configuration utility for the network card  
installed in your computer.  
•
Compare the network’s settings to those on the device’s network configuration  
page, and note any differences. For more information, see Understand the network  
configuration page. Possible problems include the following:  
•
•
The WAP filters hardware addresses (MAC addresses).  
One of these settings in the device might be incorrect: communication mode,  
network name (SSID), channel (ad hoc networks only), authentication type,  
encryption.  
•
Print a document. If the document still does not print, then reset the device’s  
network settings and reinstall the device software.  
If the wireless network settings are correct, the computer might be associated with  
another wireless network. Ensure that the computer is associated with the same  
wireless network as that of the device.  
Users can ensure this by checking the wireless settings on their respective computers.  
In addition, ensure that the computers have access to the wireless network.  
If the wireless network settings are incorrect, follow these steps to correct the device’s  
settings:  
1. Connect the device to your network with a network cable or to the computer using  
the network cable.  
2. Open the device’s embedded Web server.  
3. Click the Networking tab, and then click Wireless (802.11) in the left pane.  
4. Use the Wireless Setup wizard on the Wireless Setup tab to change the device’s  
settings to match the settings of the network.  
5. Close the device’s embedded Web server, and then disconnect the network cable  
from the device.  
6. Uninstall the device software completely, and then reinstall the software.  
191  
Troubleshoot installation issues  
 
Chapter 10  
Add hardware addresses to a wireless access point (WAP)  
MAC filtering is a security feature in which a wireless access point (WAP) is configured  
with a list of MAC addresses (also called “hardware addresses”) of devices that are  
allowed to gain access to the network through the WAP. If the WAP does not have the  
hardware address of a device attempting to access the network, the WAP denies the  
device access to the network. If the WAP filters MAC addresses, then the device’s  
MAC address must be added to the WAP’s list of accepted MAC addresses.  
•
Print the network configuration page. For more information, see Understand the  
network configuration page.  
•
Open the WAP’s configuration utility, and add the device’s hardware address to  
the list of accepted MAC addresses.  
Reset network configuration settings  
If the device is still unable to communicate with the network, reset the device’s network  
settings.  
•
•
•
Press Setup. Press an arrow button to move to Network, and then press OK.  
Press an arrow button to move to Restore Network Defaults, and then press OK.  
Print the network configuration page and verify that the network settings have  
been reset. For more information, see Understand the network configuration page.  
By default, the network name (SSID) is “hpsetup” and the communication mode is  
“ad hoc.”  
Clear jams  
Occasionally, media becomes jammed during a job. Try the following remedies before  
you attempt to clear the jam.  
•
Make sure that you are printing with media that meets specifications. For more  
information, see Select print media.  
•
•
•
Make sure that you are printing with media that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged.  
Make sure that the device is clean. For more information, see Clean the device.  
Make sure that the input trays are loaded correctly and are not too full. For more  
information, see Load media.  
192  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
   
Clear a jam in the device  
To clear a jam  
1. Remove all media from the output tray.  
2. Check the rear access panel or the duplexer.  
a. Push the button on either side of the rear access panel or the duplexer, and  
then remove the panel or unit.  
b. Locate any jammed media inside the device, grasp it with both hands and then  
pull it towards you.  
c. If the jam is not there, push the latch on the top of the duplexer and lower its  
cover. If the jam is inside, carefully remove it. Close the cover.  
d. Reinsert the rear access panel or the duplexer into the device.  
193  
Clear jams  
 
Chapter 10  
3. If you cannot locate the jam, lift the output tray and check for a jam in Tray 1. If  
media is jammed in the tray, do the following:  
a. Raise the output tray.  
b. Pull the paper towards you.  
c. Lower the output tray.  
4. If you have not found the jam and have Tray 2 installed, pull out the tray and  
remove the jammed media, if possible. If not, do the following:  
a. Ensure the device is turned off and disconnect the power cord.  
b. Lift the device off Tray 2.  
c. Remove the jammed media from the bottom of the device or from Tray 2.  
d. Reposition the device on top of Tray 2.  
5. Open the print carriage access door. If there is paper remaining inside the device,  
ensure the carriage has moved to the right of the device, free any paper scraps or  
wrinkled media, and pull the media towards you through the top of the device.  
WARNING! Do not reach into the device when it is on and the carriage is  
stuck. When you open the print carriage access door, the carriage should  
return to its position on the right side of the device. If it does not move to the  
right, turn off the device before you remove any jam.  
6. After clearing the jam, close all covers, turn on the device (if you turned it off) and  
resend the print job.  
194  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
Clear jams in the ADF  
If media is jammed in the ADF, use the following instructions below to clear the jam.  
For information about how to avoid jams, see Tips for avoiding jams.  
To clear a jam in the ADF  
1. If a page is sticking out of an area, gently try to remove it without tearing the page.  
If you feel resistance, continue with the following steps.  
2. Remove the document feeder and open the ADF cover.  
3. Remove the jam cleanout part. Using both hands, lift up on the two handles until  
the part unsnaps. Rotate and lift out the cleanout and set it aside.  
195  
Clear jams  
   
Chapter 10  
4. While lifting the green lever, rotate the pick mechanism until it stays open.  
5. Gently try to remove the page without tearing it. If you feel resistance, continue  
with the next step.  
6. Open the ADF and gently loosen the media by using both hands.  
7. When the media is free, gently pull it out.  
8. Close the ADF.  
9. Lower the green lever.  
10. Reinstall the jam cleanout part by inserting it as shown. Push down on the two tabs  
until the part snaps into place.  
NOTE: If the cleanout part is not replaced correctly, future jamming might  
occur.  
196  
Maintain and troubleshoot  
11. Close the ADF and replace the document feeder tray.  
Tips for avoiding jams  
•
Make sure that nothing is blocking the paper path.  
•
•
•
Do not overload the trays. For more information, see Understand specifications for  
supported media.  
Load paper properly and when the device is not printing. For more information, see  
Load media and Load an original in the automatic document feeder (ADF).  
When reinserting Tray 2 (optional) into the device, do so gently. Forceful insertion  
with a full stack of paper may cause sheets to slide up within the device, causing it  
to jam or pick multiple sheets at one time.  
•
•
Do not use media that is curled or crumpled.  
Always use media that conforms with specifications. For more information, see  
Select print media.  
•
•
•
Make sure the output tray is not overly full.  
Make sure media is aligned against the right side of a tray.  
Make sure the media length and width guides are adjusted snugly against the  
media, but do not crinkle or bend it.  
197  
Clear jams  
   
A
HP supplies and accessories  
This section provides information on HP supplies and accessories for the device. The information  
is subject to changes, visit the HP Web site (www.hpshopping.com) for the latest updates. You  
may also make purchases through the Web site.  
•
•
•
Order printing supplies online  
Accessories  
Supplies  
Order printing supplies online  
Besides the HP Web site, you may order printing supplies using the following tools:  
•
Embedded Web server: Click the Order Supplies button from any page in the embedded  
Web server.  
•
•
Toolbox (Windows): On the Estimated Ink Level tab, click Shop Online.  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS): Click Supplies Status from the Information and Support  
panel, click the Shop for HP Supplies drop-down menu, and then choose Online.  
Accessories  
HP automatic two-sided  
printing accessory  
C9278A  
Auto-duplexer allowing printing on  
both sides of a sheet of paper  
automatically  
350-sheet input tray  
CB007A  
J6035C  
J7942A  
Optional second tray for up to 350  
pages of plain paper  
HP Jetdirect 175x Print  
Server-Fast Ethernet*  
External print server (USB 1.0)  
External print server (USB 2.0)  
Wireless or wired external print server  
Bluetooth compatible USB adapter  
HP Jetdirect en3700 Fast  
Ethernet Print Server*  
HP Jetdirect ew2400 802.11g J7951A  
Wireless Print Server*  
HP bt300, Bluetooth Wireless Q3395A  
Printer Adapter  
*Only supports print functionality.  
Supplies  
•
Ink cartridges  
Printheads  
HP media  
•
•
Ink cartridges  
Use only the replacement cartridges that have the same cartridge number as the ink cartridge  
you are replacing. You can find the cartridge number in the following places:  
•
On the self-test diagnostic page. For more information, see Understand the self-test  
diagnostic page.  
•
On the label of the ink cartridge you are replacing.  
198  
HP supplies and accessories  
                 
•
•
•
Embedded Web server: Click the Information tab, and then click Ink Supplies in the left  
pane.  
Toolbox (Windows): Click the Estimated Ink Level tab, and then click the Cartridge  
Details button to view information about replacement ink cartridges.  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS): Open the Information and Support panel, and then click  
Supply Info.  
NOTE: The availability of ink cartridges varies by country/region. If you live in Europe, go to  
www.hp.com/eu/hard-to-find-supplies to locate information on HP ink cartridges.  
Printheads  
HP 88 Black and Yellow  
HP 88 Magenta and Cyan  
C9381A  
C9382A  
HP media  
To order media such as HP Premium Plus Photo Paper or HP Premium Paper, go to www.hp.com.  
Choose your country/region, and then select Buy or Shopping.  
Supplies  
199  
         
B
Support and warranty  
The information in Maintain and troubleshoot suggests solutions to common problems. If your  
device is not operating correctly and those suggestions did not solve your problem, try using one  
of the following support services to obtain assistance.  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
•
•
•
Obtain electronic support  
Obtain HP telephone support  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement  
Prepare the device for shipment  
Pack the device  
Obtain electronic support  
To find support and warranty information, go to the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. If  
prompted, choose your country/region, and then click Contact HP for information on calling for  
technical support.  
This Web site also offers technical support, drivers, supplies, ordering information and other  
options such as:  
•
•
•
•
Access online support pages.  
Send HP an e-mail message for answers to your questions.  
Connect with an HP technician by using online chat.  
Check for software updates.  
You can also obtain support from HP from the following electronic sources:  
•
Toolbox (Windows): The Toolbox provides easy, step-by-step solutions to common printing  
problems. For more information, see Toolbox (Windows).  
•
Embedded Web server: When the device is connected to a network, you can use the  
embedded Web server to view status information, change settings, and manage the device at  
your computer. For more information, see Embedded Web server.  
Support options and availability vary by product, country/region, and language.  
Obtain HP telephone support  
During the warranty period, you may obtain assistance from the HP Customer Care Center.  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
Before you call  
Telephone support numbers  
Before you call  
Visit the HP Web site (www.hp.com/support) for the latest troubleshooting information, or product  
fixes and updates.  
To assist our Customer Care Center representatives to serve you better, prepare the following  
information if you need to call HP.  
1. Print the self-test diagnostic page of the device. For more information, see Understand the  
self-test diagnostic page. If the device does not print, get the following information ready:  
•
•
Device model  
Model number and serial number (check the back of the device)  
2. Check the operating system that you are using, such as Windows XP.  
3. If the device is connected to the network, check the network operating system.  
200  
Support and warranty  
           
4. Note how the device is connected to your system, such as through USB or network  
connection.  
5. Obtain the version number of the printer software, such as HP Officejet Pro L7500 Series  
Version: 60.52.213.0. (To find the version number of the printer driver, open the printer  
settings or properties dialog box, and click the About tab.)  
6. If you have a problem printing from a particular application, note the application and version  
number.  
Telephone support numbers  
In many locations, HP provides toll free telephone support during the warranty period. However,  
some of the support numbers listed below may not be toll free.  
For the most current list of telephone support numbers, see www.hp.com/support.  
201  
Obtain HP telephone support  
   
Appendix B  
202  
Support and warranty  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement  
203  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement  
 
Appendix B  
Prepare the device for shipment  
If after contacting HP Customer Support or returning to the point of purchase, you are requested  
to send the device in for service, make sure you remove and keep the following items before  
returning your device:  
•
•
•
•
•
The ink cartridges and printheads  
The control-panel faceplate  
The power cord, USB cable, and any other cable connected to the device  
Any paper loaded in the input tray  
Remove any originals you might have loaded in the device  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
Remove the ink cartridges and printheads before shipment  
Remove the control-panel faceplate  
Remove the ink cartridges and printheads before shipment  
Before you return the device, make sure you remove your ink cartridges and printheads.  
NOTE: This information does not apply to customers in Japan.  
To remove ink cartridges before shipment  
1. Turn on the device and wait until the print carriage is idle and silent. If the device will not turn  
on, skip this step and go to step 2.  
NOTE: If the device does not turn on, you can unplug the power cord and then  
manually slide the print carriage to the far right side to remove the ink cartridges.  
2. Gently pull open the ink cartridge cover.  
204  
Support and warranty  
     
3. Remove the ink cartridges from their slots by grasping each between your thumb and  
forefinger and pulling it firmly toward you.  
4. Place the ink cartridges in an airtight plastic container so they will not dry out, and put them  
aside. Do not send them with the device unless the HP customer support call agent instructs  
you to.  
5. Close the ink cartridge door and wait a few minutes for the print carriage to move back to its  
home position (on the left side).  
6. After the scanner is idle and has returned to its parked position, press the Power button to  
turn off the device.  
To remove printheads before shipment  
1. Open the top cover.  
2. If the carriage does not move to the left automatically, press and hold the OK button for 5  
seconds. Wait for the carriage to stop moving.  
3. Lift the printhead latch.  
4. Lift the handle of a printhead and use it to pull the printhead out of its slot.  
5. Place the printheads in an airtight plastic container so they will not dry out, and put them  
aside. Do not send them with the device unless the HP customer support call agent instructs  
you to.  
6. Close the top cover.  
7. After the scanner is idle and has returned to its parked position, press the Power button to  
turn off the device.  
Remove the control-panel faceplate  
Complete the following steps once you have removed the ink cartridges and printheads.  
NOTE: This information does not apply to customers in Japan.  
CAUTION: The device must be unplugged before following these steps.  
CAUTION: The replacement device will not be shipped with a power cord. Store the power  
cord in a safe place until the replacement arrives.  
To remove the control-panel faceplate  
1. Press the Power button to turn off the device.  
2. Unplug the power cord, and then disconnect it from the device. Do not return the power cord  
with the device.  
205  
Prepare the device for shipment  
   
Appendix B  
3. Remove the control-panel faceplate as follows:  
a. Lift the ADF lid.  
b. Use either your finger or insert a thin object in the tab on the upper right corner of the  
control-panel faceplate to pry the control-panel faceplate off.  
4. Retain the control-panel faceplate. Do not return the control-panel faceplate with the HP All-  
in-One.  
CAUTION: The replacement device might not come with a control-panel faceplate.  
Store your control-panel faceplate in a safe place, and when the replacement device  
arrives, reattach your control-panel faceplate. You must attach your control-panel  
faceplate to use the control-panel functions on the replacement device.  
NOTE: See the setup poster that came with the device for instructions on how to attach  
your control-panel faceplate. The replacement device might come with instructions for  
setting up your device.  
Pack the device  
Complete the following steps after you have prepared the device for shipment.  
206  
Support and warranty  
   
To pack the device  
1. If available, pack the device for shipment by using the original packaging materials, or use  
the packaging materials that came with your replacement device.  
If you do not have the original packaging materials, please use other adequate packaging  
materials. Shipping damage caused by improper packaging and/or improper transportation is  
not covered under the warranty.  
2. Place the return shipping label on the outside of the box.  
3. Include the following items in the box:  
•
•
•
A complete description of symptoms for service personnel (samples of print quality  
problems are helpful).  
A copy of the sales slip or other proof of purchase to establish the warranty coverage  
period.  
Your name, address, and a phone number where you can be reached during the day.  
207  
Pack the device  
C
Device specifications  
For media and media-handling specifications, see Understand specifications for supported media.  
Physical specifications  
Size (width x depth x height)  
•
•
Device with A4/Letter-size scanner glass (L7300, L7500): 505 x 402 x 356 mm (19.9 x  
15.8 x 14 inches)  
Device with Legal-size scanner glass (L7600, L7700): 531 x 465 x 356 mm (20.9 x 18.3 x  
14 inches)  
•
•
With Duplexer: Adds 64 mm (2.5 inches) to the rear of the device.  
With Tray 2: Adds 76 mm (3 inches) to the height of the device.  
Device weight (does not include printheads or ink cartridges)  
•
•
•
•
Device with A4/Letter-size scanner glass (L7300, L7500): 14.2 kg (31.3 lb)  
Device with Legal-size scanner glass (L7600, L7700): 14.76 kg (32.5 lb)  
With Duplexer: Adds 0.95 kg (2.0 lb)  
With Tray 2: Adds 2.5 kg (5.5 lb)  
Product features and capacities  
Feature  
Capacity  
•
•
Connectivity  
USB 2.0-compliant high speed  
USB host connector is only supported up  
to full speed.  
•
•
Fast Ethernet 10/100Base-TX for wired  
network connection (some models only)  
802.11b/g wireless network (some  
models only)  
Print method  
Ink cartridges  
Drop-on-demand thermal inkjet printing  
Four ink cartridges (one each for black, cyan,  
magenta, and yellow)  
Printheads  
Two printheads (one black and yellow, and  
one magenta and cyan)  
Visit www.hp.com/pageyield/ for more  
Supply yields  
information on estimated ink cartridge yields.  
Device languages  
Font support  
HP PCL 3 enhanced  
US fonts: CG Times, CG Times Italic,  
Universe, Universe Italic, Courier, Courier  
Italic, Letter Gothic, Letter Gothic Italic.  
Up to 7500 pages per month  
Duty cycle  
Control panel language support  
Bulgarian, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch,  
English, Finnish, French, German, Greek,  
Language availability varies by country/region.  
208  
Device specifications  
                       
Feature  
Capacity  
Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Korean,  
Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian,  
Russian, Simplified Chinese, Slovak,  
Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Traditional  
Chinese, Turkish, Ukrainian.  
Processor and memory specifications  
Device processor  
192 MHz ARM946ES, ETM9 (medium)  
Device memory  
•
•
•
L7300/L7500: 64 MB built-in RAM, 16 MB built-in MROM + 2 MB built-in Flash ROM  
L7600: 64 MB built-in RAM, 16 MB built-in MROM + 4 MB built-in Flash ROM  
L7700: 64 + 32 MB built-in RAM, 16 MB built-in MROM + 4 MB built-in Flash ROM  
System requirements  
NOTE: For the most current information about supported operating systems and system  
requirements, visit http://www.hp.com/support/  
Operating system compatibility  
•
•
•
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows XP x64* (Professional and Home Editions)  
Mac OS X (10.3, 10.4)  
Linux  
NOTE: Printer and scanner drivers for Windows Server 2003 (both 32-bit and 64-bit  
versions) require a minimum of an Intel® Pentium® II or Intel Celeron® processor, 128 MB  
RAM, 200 MB free hard disk space. The drivers are available at http://www.hp.com/support/.  
Minimum requirements  
•
•
•
•
•
Windows 2000: Intel Pentium II or Celeron processor, 128 MB RAM, 280 MB free hard disk  
space  
Windows XP (32-bit): Intel Pentium II or Celeron processor, 128 MB RAM, 280 MB free hard  
disk space  
Windows XP x64: Intel Pentium II or Celeron processor, 128 MB RAM, 280 MB free hard  
disk space  
Mac OS X (10.3.8, 10.4.x): 400 MHz Power PC G3 (v10.3.8 and v10.4.x) or 1.83 GHz Intel  
Core Duo (v10.4.x), 128 MB memory, 300 MB free hard disk space  
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0  
Recommended requirements  
•
•
•
Windows 2000: Intel Pentium III or higher processor, 256 MB RAM, 500 MB free hard disk  
space  
Windows XP (32-bit): Intel Pentium III or higher processor, 256 MB RAM, 500 MB free hard  
disk space  
Windows XP x64: Intel Pentium III or higher processor, 256 MB RAM, 500 MB free hard disk  
space  
209  
Processor and memory specifications  
         
Appendix C  
•
•
Mac OS X (10.3.8, 10.4.x): 400 MHz Power PC G3 (v10.3.8 and v10.4.x) or 1.83 GHz Intel  
Core Duo (v10.4.x), 256 MB memory, 600 MB free hard disk space  
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later  
Network protocol specifications  
Network operating system compatibility  
•
•
•
Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit), Windows XP x64 (Professional and Home Editions)  
Mac OS X (10.3, 10.4)  
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Terminal Services with Citrix Metaframe XP with Feature  
Release 3  
•
•
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Terminal Services with Citrix Presentation Server 4.0  
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Terminal Services  
Microsoft Windows 2003 Server Terminal Services  
Microsoft Windows 2003 Server Terminal Services with Citrix Presentation Server 4.0  
Microsoft Windows 2003 Server Terminal Services with Citrix Metaframe XP with Feature  
Release 3  
•
Novell Netware 6, 6.5, Open Enterprise Server 6.5  
Compatible network protocols  
TCP/IP  
Network management  
•
•
HP Web Jetadmin plug-ins  
Embedded Web server  
Features  
•
•
Ability to remotely configure and manage network devices  
myPrintMileage  
Embedded Web server specifications  
Requirements  
•
•
A TCP/IP-based network (IPX/SPX-based networks are not supported)  
A Web browser (either Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5, Netscape 7.0, Opera 7.54, Mozilla  
Firefox 1.0, or Safari 1.2, or later)  
•
•
A network connection (you cannot use the embedded Web server connected directly to a  
computer with a USB cable)  
An Internet connection (required for some features)  
NOTE: You can open the embedded Web server without being connected to the  
Internet. However, some features will not be available.  
•
It must be on the same side of a firewall as the device.  
Print specifications  
Print resolution  
Black  
Up to 1200 dpi with pigmented black ink  
210  
Device specifications  
                 
Color  
HP enhanced photo quality with Vivera inks (up to 4800 by 1200 dpi Optimized on HP Premium  
Plus photo papers with 1200 by 1200 input dpi)  
Copy specifications  
•
Digital image processing  
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 100 copies from original (varies by model)  
Digital zoom: from 25 to 400% (varies by model)  
Fit to page, pre-scan  
Copy speed: up to 30 copies per minute black; 24 copies per minute color (varies by model)  
Copy speeds vary according to the complexity of the document  
Mode  
Type  
Speed (ppm)  
Scan resolution (dpi)  
1
Best  
Black  
up to 0.8  
up to 0.8  
up to 8.5  
up to 5.1  
up to 30  
up to 24  
up to 600 x 1200  
up to 600 x 1200  
up to 300 x 300  
up to 300 x 300  
up to 300 x 300  
up to 300 x 300  
Color  
Normal  
Fast  
Black  
Color  
Black  
Color  
1
Maximum at 400% scaling.  
Fax specifications  
•
•
•
Walk-up black-and-white and color fax capability.  
Up to 110 speed dials (varies by model).  
Up to 120-page memory (varies by model, based on ITU-T Test Image #1 at standard  
resolution). More complicated pages or higher resolution takes longer and uses more memory.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manual fax send and receive.  
Automatic busy redial up to five times (varies by model).  
Automatic no-answer redial one time (varies by model).  
Confirmation and activity reports.  
CCITT/ITU Group 3 fax with Error Correction Mode.  
33.6 Kbps transmission.  
3 seconds per page speed at 33.6 Kbps (based on ITU-T Test Image #1 at standard  
resolution). More complicated pages or higher resolution take longer and use more memory.  
•
Ring detect with automatic fax/answering machine switching.  
Photo (dpi)  
Very Fine (dpi)  
Fine (dpi)  
Standard (dpi)  
Black  
Color  
196 x 203 (8-bit  
grayscale)  
300 x 300  
196 x 203  
196 x 98  
200 x 200  
200 x 200  
200 x 200  
200 x 200  
211  
Copy specifications  
         
Appendix C  
Scan specifications  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Image editor included  
Integrated OCR software automatically converts scanned text to editable text  
Scan speeds vary according to the complexity of the document  
Twain-compliant interface  
Resolution: 2400 x 4800 ppi optical, up to 19,200 ppi enhanced  
Color: 16-bit per RGB color, 48-bit total  
Maximum scan size from glass: 216 x 297 mm (8.5 x 11.7 inches)  
Direct Digital Filing specifications  
•
Scan a hardcopy original from the ADF or scanner glass to create a digital document (with  
network connection) that is placed in a network folder  
Supports pre-programmed network folder path  
Supports Digital Filing Speed-dials  
•
•
•
•
•
Resolution: 75 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 600 dpi  
Supported file formats: PDF, JPG  
Supported network configuration: TCP/IP network  
Environmental specifications  
Operating environment  
Operating temperature: 5° to 40° C (41° to 104° F)  
Recommended operating conditions: 15° to 32° C (59° to 90° F)  
Recommended relative humidity: 25 to 75% noncondensing  
Storage environment  
Storage temperature: -40° to 60° C (-40° to 140° F)  
Storage relative humidity: Up to 90% noncondensing at a temperature of 65° C (150° F)  
Electrical specifications  
Power supply  
Universal power adapter (external)  
Power requirements  
Input voltage: 100 to 240 VAC (± 10%), 50/60 Hz (± 3Hz)  
Output voltage: 32 Vdc, 2500 mA  
Power consumption  
•
•
L7300/L7500: 32 watts printing; 35 watts faxing or copying  
L7600/L7700: 33 watts printing; 37 watts faxing or copying  
Acoustic emission specifications (print in Draft mode, noise levels  
per ISO 7779)  
Sound pressure (bystander position)  
LpAd 55 (dBA)  
Sound power  
LwAd 6.9 (BA)  
212  
Device specifications  
                   
Supported devices  
USB flash drives  
HP has fully tested the following USB flash drives with the device:  
•
•
•
•
•
SanDisk Cruzer Micro: High-speed, 0120-256, 256 MB  
Iomega Micro Mini: Full-speed, 064-0417450-YCAE032171, 128 MB  
Kingston DataTraveler II: High-speed, KF112504 f5274-006, 128 MB and 256 MB  
Sony Microvault: High-speed, D04825AB, 256 MB  
Lexar Media JumpDrive: 256 MB  
Note: You might be able to use other USB flash drives with the device. However, HP cannot  
guarantee that they will function properly with the device because they have not been fully tested.  
Memory card specifications  
•
Maximum recommended number of files on a memory card: 1,000  
•
•
Maximum recommended individual file size: 12 megapixel maximum, 8 MB maximum  
Maximum recommended memory card size: 1 GB (solid state only)  
NOTE: Approaching any of the recommended maximums on a memory card might cause  
the performance of the device to be slower than expected.  
Supported memory card types  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CompactFlash  
Memory Stick  
Memory Stick Duo  
Memory Stick Pro  
Secure Digital  
MultiMediaCard (MMC)  
xD-Picture Card  
Other memory cards, including Memory Stick Magic Gate Duo, Memory Stick Duo, and Secure  
Multimedia Card, are supported with the use of an adapter. See the instructions that came with  
your memory card for more information.  
213  
Supported devices  
     
D
Regulatory information  
This section contains the following topics:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FCC statement  
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network  
Notice to users in the European Economic Area  
Other regulatory information  
Regulatory information for wireless products  
Declaration of conformity  
Environmental sustainability program  
FCC statement  
The United States Federal Communications Commission (in 47 cfr 15.105) has specified that the  
following notices be brought to the attention of users of this product. This device complies with  
part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may  
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Shielded cables  
Use of a shielded data cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of the FCC  
Rules.  
Pursuant to Part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, any changes or modifications to this equipment  
not expressly approved by the Hewlett-Packard Company, may cause harmful interference  
and void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment  
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
For further information, contact:  
Manager of Corporate Product Regulations  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
3000 Hanover Street  
Palo Alto, CA 94304  
(650) 857-1501  
214  
Regulatory information  
           
Exposure to radio frequency radiation (wireless products only)  
215  
FCC statement  
   
Appendix D  
Notice to users of the U.S. telephone network  
216  
Regulatory information  
 
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network  
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network  
217  
 
Appendix D  
Notice to users in the European Economic Area  
Other regulatory information  
•
•
•
•
•
EMI statement (Korea)  
VCCI statement (Japan)  
Regulatory model number  
Power cord statement  
LED classification  
EMI statement (Korea)  
218  
Regulatory information  
       
VCCI statement (Japan)  
Regulatory model number  
For regulatory identification purposes, your product is assigned a Regulatory Model Number. The  
Regulatory Model Number for your product is SNPRC-0602–01 or SNPRC-0602–02. This  
regulatory number should not be confused with the marketing name (HP Officejet Pro L7300/  
L7500/L7600/L7700) or product number (CB778A, C8157A, C8158A, C8159A).  
Power cord statement  
The power cord cannot be repaired. If it is defective, it should be discarded or returned to the  
supplier.  
LED classification  
Regulatory information for wireless products  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Notice to users in Canada/Note à l'attention des utilisateurs Canadien  
Notice to users in Brazil/Notificação de Normas de Uso de Dispositivos Sem Fio do Brasil  
Notice to users in the European Union (English)  
Notice to users in France  
Notice to users in Germany  
Notice to users in Italy  
Notice to users in Spain  
219  
Regulatory information for wireless products  
                   
Appendix D  
Notice to users in Canada/Note à l'attention des utilisateurs Canadien  
Notice to users in Brazil/Notificação de Normas de Uso de Dispositivos Sem Fio do  
Brasil  
220  
Regulatory information  
   
Notice to users in the European Union (English)  
221  
Regulatory information for wireless products  
 
Appendix D  
Notice to users in France  
222  
Regulatory information  
 
Notice to users in Germany  
223  
Regulatory information for wireless products  
 
Appendix D  
Notice to users in Italy  
224  
Regulatory information  
 
Notice to users in Spain  
225  
Regulatory information for wireless products  
 
Appendix D  
Declaration of conformity  
HP Officejet Pro L7500/L7600  
226  
Regulatory information  
 
HP Officejet Pro L7700  
227  
Declaration of conformity  
Appendix D  
Environmental sustainability program  
Hewlett-Packard is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner.  
HP continuously improves the design processes of its products to minimize the negative impact  
on the office environment and on the communities where devices are manufactured, shipped,  
and used. HP has also developed processes to minimize the negative impact of the disposal of  
the device at the end of its printing life.  
For more information about HP's environmental sustainability program, see www.hp.com/hpinfo/  
globalcitizenship/environment/index.html.  
Reduction and elimination  
Paper use  
This product's two-sided (duplex) printing and N-up printing feature (which allows you to print  
multiple pages of a document on one sheet of paper) can reduce paper usage and the resulting  
demands on natural resources. See this guide for more information about using these features.  
Ink use  
This product's draft mode uses less ink, which might extend the life of the cartridges. See the  
print driver's online Help for more information.  
Ozone-depleting chemicals  
Ozone-depleting chemicals, such as chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), have been eliminated from HP  
manufacturing processes.  
Power consumption  
Power usage drops significantly while in PowerSave/Sleep mode, which saves natural resources  
and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product.  
Battery information  
This device contains the following, mercury-free battery:  
Specification  
Value  
Battery part numbe  
Battery material  
Battery type  
1420-0887  
Lithium polycarbon monfluoride  
Button/coin cell battery  
1
Quantity per product  
Weight  
2.50 grams (0.09 ounces)  
Panasonic, Japan  
Battery manufacturer  
NOTE: The battery might require recycling or proper disposal at end-of-life.  
228  
Regulatory information  
           
Material safety data sheets  
Material safety data sheets (MSDSs) can be obtained from the following HP Web site:  
www.hp.com/go/msds.  
Recycling  
Design for recycling has been incorporated into this device:  
•
The number of materials has been kept to a minimum while ensuring proper functionality and  
reliability.  
•
•
•
Dissimilar materials have been designed to separate easily.  
Fasteners and other connections are easy to locate, access, and remove using common tools.  
High-priority parts have been designed so that they can be accessed quickly for efficient  
disassembly and repair.  
Product packaging  
The packaging materials for this device have been selected to provide maximum protection for  
the least cost possible, while attempting to minimize environmental impact and facilitate recycling.  
The rugged design of the device assists in minimizing both packaging materials and damage rates.  
Plastics  
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the  
ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product's life.  
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European  
Union  
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this  
product must not be disposed of with your other household  
waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste  
equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for  
the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The  
separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the  
time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and  
ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health  
and the environment. For more information about where you can  
drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your  
local city office, your household waste disposal service or the  
shop where you purchased the product.  
HP products and supplies  
HP's Planet Partners™ recycling service provides an easy way to recycle any brand of computer  
equipment or HP printing supplies. HP's state-of-the-art processes ensure that your unwanted  
hardware or HP printing supply is recycled in a way that conserves resources.  
For more information, see www.hp.com/recycle.  
229  
Environmental sustainability program  
                   
Index  
black and white pages  
copy 50  
cancel  
copy 51  
A
accessibility 11  
fax 70  
print job 49  
accessories  
troubleshoot 164  
black dots or streaks,  
troubleshoot  
scan 57  
Cancel button 17  
capacity  
installation 21  
order 198  
self-test diagnostic page 97  
turn on and off in driver 22  
warranty 203  
copies 169  
scan 173  
ADF 30  
trays 36  
blank pages, troubleshoot  
copy 167  
cards  
acoustic emissions 212  
Add Printer installation 128  
ADF (automatic document  
feeder)  
guidelines 32  
print 160  
scan 173  
blocked fax numbers  
control panel button 16  
set up 77  
sizes supported 34  
tray supporting 36  
cartridges. See ink cartridges  
chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) 228  
clean  
capacity 30  
clean 153  
clear jams 195  
view list 78  
Bluetooth  
ADF 153  
exterior 157  
printheads 147  
load originals 30  
media sizes supported 33  
administrator  
color display icon 18  
connect devices 136  
dongle, order online 198  
features available 20  
Mac OS, print from 138  
security settings 138  
setup 135  
scanner glass 152  
color copy 50  
colored text, and OCR 56  
colors  
management tools 86  
settings 88  
ADSL, fax setup with  
parallel phone systems 106  
aligning printheads 146  
answer ring pattern  
change 80  
parallel phone systems 108  
answering machine  
fax tones recorded 185  
set up with fax (parallel  
phone systems) 117  
set up with fax and  
modem 118  
bleeding 165  
faded or dull 164  
print black and white,  
troubleshoot 164  
specifications 210  
troubleshoot 165  
wrong 164  
Windows, print from 136  
borderless printing  
Mac OS 43  
Windows 42  
both sides, print on 48  
broadcast faxing  
send 73  
CompactFlash memory card  
insert 58  
buttons, control panel 16  
slot, locating 14  
computer modem  
shared with fax (parallel  
phone systems) 111  
shared with fax and  
answering machine  
(parallel phone  
Attention light 16  
Auto Answer button 17  
automatic document feeder  
(ADF)  
C
cables  
order USB 198  
capacity 30  
clean 153  
clear jams 195  
regulatory compliance 214  
calibrate linefeed 147  
cameras  
systems) 118  
shared with fax and voice  
line (parallel phone  
systems) 113  
load originals 30  
media sizes supported 33  
connect 59, 61  
control panel display  
mode 19  
shared with fax and voice  
mail (parallel phone  
systems) 122  
insert memory cards 58  
port, locating 14, 59  
print DPOF files 59  
save photos to computer 68  
B
Back button 17  
backup fax reception 74  
baud rate 82  
confirmation reports, fax 84  
230  
 
Index  
connections  
Declaration of Conformity  
(DOC) 226  
settings 47  
version 201  
Bluetooth 135  
features available 19  
connectors, locating 15  
control panel  
default settings  
warranty 203  
control panel 25  
copy 50  
driver 47  
DSL, fax setup with  
parallel phone systems 106  
duplex printing accessory  
order online 198  
duplexer  
administrator settings 88  
buttons 16  
copy from 50  
crop images 51  
display 19  
enter text and symbols 28  
faceplate, removing 205  
lights 16  
print 47  
deleting faxes from memory 75  
dial tone test, failure 178  
dial type, setting 81  
dial-up modem  
clear jams 192  
installation 21  
locating 15  
margins, minimum 37  
media sizes supported 33  
media types and weights  
supported 36  
turn on and off in driver 22  
using 48  
shared with fax (parallel  
phone systems) 111  
shared with fax and  
answering machine  
(parallel phone sy  
anstems) 118  
locating 13  
manage device 86  
menus 24  
messages 25  
network settings 99  
print photos 62  
scan from 52  
send faxes 71  
send scans to  
shared with fax and voice  
line (parallel phone  
systems) 113  
shared with fax and voice  
mail (parallel phone  
systems) 122  
duty cycle 208  
E
edit  
scanned images 56  
text in OCR program 56  
electrical specifications 212  
embedded Web server  
about 90  
programs 54  
settings, change 25  
status icons 18  
copy  
digital cameras  
connect 59, 61  
control panel display  
mode 19  
cancel 51  
administrator settings 88  
answer ring pattern, fax 81  
backup fax reception, set  
up 75  
blocked fax numbers,  
view 78  
clear fax log 76  
fax header, setting 79  
fax log, view 85  
features 86  
forwarding faxes 76  
opening 90  
crop originals 50  
from the control panel 50  
quality 168  
insert memory cards 58  
port, locating 14, 59  
print DPOF files 59  
save photos to computer 68  
Digital Filing  
settings 50  
specifications 211  
troubleshoot 167  
Copy button 16  
Copy menu 24  
correct port test, fax 176  
critical error messages 25  
crop originals 50  
custom-sized media  
guidelines 33  
scan to 54  
digital filing  
set up 52  
Digital Filing button 16  
display, control panel 19  
distinctive ringing  
change 80  
parallel phone systems 108  
DOC 226  
documentation 10  
dots or streaks, troubleshoot  
copies 169  
dots per inch (dpi)  
fax 16  
print 210  
dots, troubleshoot  
scan 173  
double-sided printing 48  
DPOF files 59  
driver  
pages 91  
system requirements 210  
troubleshoot, cannot be  
opened 187  
print on 41  
sizes supported 35  
customer support  
electronic 200  
HP Instant Support 94  
phone support 200  
cut-off pages, troubleshoot 161  
Webscan 55  
envelopes  
guidelines 32  
sizes supported 34  
tray supporting 36  
environmental  
specifications 212  
environmental sustainability  
program 228  
D
dark images, troubleshoot  
copies 168  
scans 173  
accessories settings 22  
231  
error messages  
ISDN line, set up (parallel  
phone systems) 107  
line condition test, failed 179  
log, print 85  
speed-dial entries, set up 43  
speed-dial groups, set up 44  
test failed 174  
control panel 25  
unable to activate TWAIN  
source 171  
test setup 83  
error reports, fax 84  
error-correction mode, fax 81  
Ethernet connections 19  
Ethernet network port,  
locating 15  
manual receive 73  
modem and answering  
machine, shared with  
(parallel phone  
troubleshoot 174  
voice mail, set up (parallel  
phone systems) 110  
wall jack test, failed 175  
systems) 118  
Fax menu 24  
European Union waste  
disposal 229  
event log 97  
EWS. See embedded Web  
server  
modem and voice line,  
shared with (parallel  
phone systems) 113  
modem and voice mail,  
shared with (parallel  
phone systems) 122  
modem, shared with  
(parallel phone  
Fax Menu button 16  
fax port, locating 15  
FCC statement 214  
firewalls, troubleshoot 159  
FoIP 82  
fonts supported 208  
forwarding faxes 76  
F
faded copies 168  
faded stripes on copies,  
troubleshoot 168  
fax  
systems) 111  
G
monitor dialing 72, 73  
network folder speed-dial  
entries 45  
parallel phone systems 102  
pause 28  
PBX system, set up  
(parallel phone  
systems) 107  
phone cord connection test,  
failed 176  
phone cord too short 185  
phone cord type test,  
failed 177  
receive 73  
receive, troubleshoot 180,  
182  
redial options 81  
Redial/Pause button 17  
reports 83  
reprint 75  
rings to answer 80  
scan 17  
send 70  
send, troubleshoot 180,  
182, 184  
separate line setup (parallel  
phone systems) 105  
set up 101  
settings, change 79  
setup types 102  
shared phone line setup  
(parallel phone  
getting started guide 10  
glass, scanner  
answer mode 79  
answering machine and  
modem, shared with  
(parallel phone  
clean 152  
load originals 31  
locating 13  
grainy or white bands on  
copies, troubleshoot 169  
graphics  
systems) 118  
answering machine  
troubleshoot 185  
answering machine, set up  
(parallel phone  
incompletely filled on  
copies 169  
ink not filling in 164  
look different from original  
scan 172  
systems) 117  
auto answer 17, 79  
backup fax reception 74  
block numbers 16  
blocking numbers 77  
clear log 76  
confirmation reports 84  
deleting from memory 75  
dial tone test, failed 178  
dial type, setting 81  
distinctive ringing setup  
(parallel phone  
systems) 108  
distinctive ringing, change  
pattern 80  
DSL, set up (parallel phone  
systems) 106  
enter text and symbols 28  
error reports 84  
missing lines or dots 165  
groups, speed-dial  
set up 44  
H
hardware, fax setup test 175  
header, fax 79  
help  
HP Instant Support 94  
see also customer support  
Help button 17  
HP Instant Support  
about 94  
accessing 95  
myPrintMileage 94  
security and privacy 95  
HP Photosmart Software  
send scans to programs 54  
HP Photosmart Studio  
send scans to programs 54  
HP Planet Partners 229  
error-correction mode 81  
forwarding 76  
header 79  
systems) 109  
specifications 211  
speed 82  
Internet, over 82  
232  
Index  
HP Printer Utility (Mac OS)  
administrator settings 89  
features 86  
opening 93  
panels 93  
HP Solution Center 26  
HP Web Jetadmin  
about 94  
media to avoid 32  
prevent 197  
Japanese VCCI statement 219  
jobs  
settings 25  
Junk Fax Blocker button 16  
junk fax mode 77  
print on special, or custom-  
sized media 41  
print settings 47  
sharing device 129  
system requirements 209  
turn accessories on and off  
in driver 22  
uninstall software 141  
wireless communication  
setup 133  
features 86  
humidity specifications 212  
K
keypad, control panel  
enter text and symbols 28  
locating 16  
management tools 86  
manual faxing  
receive 73  
send 71, 72  
margins  
I
Information tab, Toolbox  
(Windows) 92  
Korean EMI statement 218  
ink cartridge door, locating 14  
ink cartridges  
L
duplexer 37  
language, printer 208  
LED classification  
statement 219  
left arrow 16  
light images, troubleshoot  
copies 168  
setting, specifications 37  
material safety data sheets  
(MSDSs) 229  
expiration dates 97  
locating 14  
order online 198  
part numbers 97, 198  
remove 204  
replace 144  
status 87, 97  
supported 143, 208  
warranty 203  
yields 208  
media  
ADF capacity 30  
borderless printing 42  
clear jams 192  
duplexing 48  
HP, order 199  
scans 173  
lights, control panel 16  
line condition test, fax 179  
linefeed, calibrate 147  
lines  
load tray 1 37  
load tray 2 39  
ink level icons 18  
ink smearing, troubleshoot 163  
installation  
copies, troubleshoot 168  
scans, troubleshoot 172,  
173  
locking trays 40  
print on custom-sized 41  
selecting 32  
skewed pages 166  
specifications 33  
supported sizes 33  
troubleshoot feeding 166  
types and weights  
supported 36  
accessories 21  
Add Printer, Windows 128  
duplexer 21  
ink cartridges 144  
software for Mac OS 128  
software for Windows 125  
tray 2 21  
troubleshoot 188  
Windows network  
software 127  
link speed, setting 100  
load  
originals in ADF (automatic  
document feeder) 30  
tray 1 38  
tray 2 39  
locking trays 40  
log, clear fax 76  
log, fax  
usage 87  
memory  
deleting faxes 75  
reprint faxes 75  
save faxes 74  
print 85  
view 85  
Internet  
fax, using 82  
specifications 209  
memory cards  
IP address  
M
checking for device 187  
static, setting 158  
IP settings 101  
ISDN line, set up with fax  
parallel phone systems 107  
Mac OS  
control panel display  
mode 19  
fax 17  
Bluetooth 138  
borderless printing 43  
duplexing 49  
HP Photosmart Studio 26  
HP Printer Utility 93  
install software 128  
Network Printer Setup  
Utility 94  
insert 58  
print DPOF files 59  
print photos 62  
proof sheets 62  
save photos to computer 68  
scan to 55  
J
jams  
ADF 195  
clear 192  
slots, locating 14  
233  
specifications 213  
troubleshoot 186  
memory device light, locating 13  
Memory Stick cards  
insert 58  
slot, locating 14, 58  
menus, control panel 24  
missing lines or dots,  
troubleshoot 165  
missing or incorrect  
information, troubleshoot 161  
MMC memory card  
insert 58  
Mac OS setup 128  
operating systems  
countries/regions with 102  
distinctive ringing setup 108  
DSL setup 106  
supported 210  
protocols supported 210  
self-test diagnostic page 96  
settings, change 99  
sharing, Windows 126  
static IP address,  
ISDN setup 107  
modem and answering  
machine setup 118  
modem and voice mail  
setup 122  
modem setup 111  
modem shared with voice  
line setup 113  
PBX setup 107  
separate line setup 105  
setup types 102  
setting 158  
system requirements 210  
view and printsettings 100  
Windows setup 127  
wireless communication  
setup 129  
slot, locating 14  
model number 97  
modem  
wireless settings 98, 130  
Wireless Setup Wizard 100  
noise information 212  
Number of Copies button 16  
shared line setup 109  
part numbers, supplies and  
accessories 198  
passkey authentication,  
Bluetooth 138  
passport photos 66  
PBX system, set up with fax  
parallel phone systems 107  
PCL 3 support 208  
phone cord  
shared with fax (parallel  
phone systems) 111  
shared with fax and  
answering machine  
(parallel phone  
O
OCR  
systems) 118  
edit scanned documents 56  
troubleshoot 171  
OK button 16  
shared with fax and voice  
line (parallel phone  
systems) 113  
shared with fax and voice  
mail (parallel phone  
systems) 122  
connected to correct port  
test failed 176  
correct type test failed 177  
extend 185  
On button 17  
one-touch speed dial buttons 16  
operating environment  
specifications 212  
operating systems  
supported 209  
monitor dialing 72, 73  
monitoring tools 87  
multi-feeds, troubleshoot 166  
myPrintMileage  
phone customer support 200  
phone line, answer ring  
pattern 80  
originals  
phone, fax from  
crop 50  
edit scans 56  
load ADF (automatic  
document feeder) 30  
scan 52  
about 95  
accessing 96  
features 86  
receive 73  
send, 71  
photo media  
guidelines 33  
sizes supported 35  
Photo menu 24  
output tray  
N
network folders  
locating 13  
Photo Menu button 16  
photos  
scan to 53  
media supported 36  
ozone-depleting chemicals 228  
troubleshoot 173  
network folders, as speed-dial  
entries 45  
Network Printer Setup Utility  
(Mac OS) 94  
borderless printing 42  
connect a PictBridge  
camera 59  
connect storage device 61  
edit scans 56  
insert memory cards 58  
panoramic 65  
passport 66  
P
packing the device 206  
pages per month (duty  
cycle) 208  
networks  
advanced settings 100  
connector illustration 15  
Digital Filing button 16  
Ethernet connections 19  
firewalls, troubleshoot 159  
HP Web Jetadmin 94  
IP settings 101  
panoramic photos 65  
paper. See media  
paper-feed problems,  
troubleshoot 165  
parallel phone systems  
answering machine  
setup 117  
print from control panel 62  
print from DPOF files 59  
proof sheets 62  
save to computer 68  
link speed 100  
234  
Index  
troubleshoot memory  
settings 47  
version 201  
warranty 203  
forwarding 76  
manually 73  
rings to answer 80  
troubleshoot 180, 182  
cards 186  
video action prints 67  
view 62  
printhead latch, locating 14  
printheads  
Photosmart Software  
send scans to programs 54  
Photosmart Studio  
send scans to programs 54  
PictBridge mode 59, 60  
PictBridge-enabled digital  
camera port, locating 14, 59  
ports, specifications 208  
power  
consumption 228  
specifications 212  
troubleshoot 158  
power cord statement 219  
power input, locating 15  
power on button 17  
print  
recycling 229  
aligning 146  
clean 147  
redial options, setting 81  
Redial/Pause button 17  
Reduce/Enlarge button 16  
regulatory information 214, 219  
regulatory model number 219  
release notes 10  
remove ink cartridges and  
printheads 204  
clean contacts manually 147  
health, check 145  
locating 14  
maintaining 145  
order online 198  
part numbers 199  
remove 204  
replace 150  
status 87, 97, 145  
supported 208  
replace  
ink cartridges 144  
printheads 150  
reports  
confirmation, fax 84  
error, fax 84  
fax test failed 174  
reprint  
troubleshoot 159  
warranty 203  
privacy, HP Instant Support 95  
processor specifications 209  
Proof Sheet button  
control panel button 17  
proof sheet button 17  
proof sheets  
Bluetooth 135  
cancel 49  
double-sided 48  
fax logs 85  
faxes from memory 75  
resolution  
fax 16, 17  
print 210  
fax reports 83  
faxes 75  
fill in 64  
print 62  
scan 64  
Resolution button 16  
Right arrow 16  
rings to answer 80  
Rotate button 17  
panoramic photos 65  
passport photos 66  
photos from DPOF file 59  
photos from memory card 62  
proof sheets 62  
self-test diagnostic page 97  
settings 47  
slow 160  
pulse dialing 81  
Q
S
save  
Quality button 17  
quality, troubleshoot  
copy 168  
default settings 25  
faxes in memory 74  
photos to computer 68  
scan  
speed-dial entries 46  
troubleshoot 158  
video action photos 67  
print cartridges. See ink  
cartridges  
diagnostic page 145  
print 162  
scan 171  
cancel 57  
Direct Digital Filing 52  
edit images 56  
error messages 171  
from a TWAIN- or WIA-  
compliant program 55  
from control panel 52  
from Webscan 55  
OCR 56  
proof sheets 64  
quality 171  
Scan Menu button 16  
scan specifications 212  
send to a program 54  
settings for 57  
R
print driver  
radio frequency radiation 215  
radio interference  
reducing 134  
regulatory information 219  
radio, turn off 100  
readme 10  
rear access panel  
clear jams 192  
illustration 15  
receive faxes  
accessories settings 22  
settings 47  
version 201  
warranty 203  
print quality  
diagnostic page 145  
troubleshoot 162  
Print quality diagnostic  
page 145  
print-carriage access door,  
locating 14  
auto answer mode 79  
automatically 73  
blocking numbers 77  
printer driver  
slow 170  
Start Color Photo button 17  
accessories settings 22  
235  
Start Color Scan button 17  
to memory card 55  
troubleshoot 169  
answering machine and  
modem (parallel phone  
systems) 118  
skew, troubleshoot  
copy 169  
print 166  
Scan menu 24  
Bluetooth 135  
scan 172  
Scan Menu button 16  
scanner glass  
computer modem (parallel  
phone systems) 111  
computer modem and  
answering machine  
(parallel phone  
slow print, troubleshoot 160  
software  
clean 152  
load originals 31  
locating 13  
accessories settings 22  
connection types 19  
HP Photosmart 26  
installation on Mac OS 128  
installation on Windows 125  
management tools 86  
OCR 56  
uninstall from Mac OS 141  
uninstall from Windows 140  
warranty 203  
Secure Digital memory card  
insert 58  
systems) 118  
computer modem and  
voice line (parallel phone  
systems) 113  
slot, locating 14  
Secure MMC memory card  
slot, locating 14  
SecureEasySetup (SES),  
wireless communication 133  
security  
computer modem and  
voice mail (parallel  
phone systems) 122  
connection types 19  
distinctive ringing 80  
distinctive ringing (parallel  
phone systems) 108  
DSL (parallel phone  
systems) 106  
Webscan 55  
Bluetooth 138  
HP Instant Support 95  
manage 87  
Solution Center 26  
sound pressure 212  
specifications  
wireless communication 134  
wireless settings 131  
self-test diagnostic page  
information on 96  
print 97  
acoustic emissions 212  
electrical 212  
media 33  
network protocols 210  
operating environment 212  
physical 208  
fax 101  
fax scenarios 102  
fax, with parallel phone  
systems 102  
send faxes  
basic fax 70  
manually 71  
monitor dialing 72, 73  
troubleshoot 180, 182, 184  
send scans  
ISDN line (parallel phone  
systems) 107  
processor and memory 209  
storage environment 212  
system requirements 209  
speed  
PBX system (parallel  
phone systems) 107  
separate fax line (parallel  
phone systems) 105  
shared phone line (parallel  
phone systems) 109  
test fax 83  
voice mail (parallel phone  
systems) 110  
voice mail and computer  
modem (parallel phone  
systems) 122  
troubleshoot for  
for OCR 56  
scanner 170  
troubleshoot print 160  
speed dial  
to a program 54  
troubleshoot 169  
serial number 97  
serial phone systems  
countries/regions with 102  
setup types 102  
Services tab, Toolbox  
(Windows) 92  
buttons 16  
Digital Filing 53  
fax numbers, set up 43  
groups, set up 44  
network folders 45  
one-touch buttons 16  
print and view 46  
send fax 70  
settings  
Windows 125  
administrator 88  
control panel 25  
copy 50  
driver 47  
network 99  
Windows networks 127  
Setup button 17  
setup poster 10  
sharing 19  
sharing device  
Start Color Photo button 17  
Start Color Scan button 17  
Start Copy buttons  
black 17  
scan 57  
Mac OS 129  
color 17  
speed, fax 82  
setup  
Windows 126  
shipping the device 204  
size  
Start Fax buttons  
black 17  
color 17  
static IP address, setting 158  
status  
answering machine  
(parallel phone  
systems) 117  
scans, troubleshoot 173  
troubleshoot copy 168  
messages 25  
236  
Index  
network configuration  
text  
setting default 40  
page 98  
self-test diagnostic page 97  
supplies 86, 87  
cannot be edited after  
scan, troubleshoot 171  
enter from control panel 28  
incompletely filled on  
copies 169  
missing from scan,  
troubleshoot 170  
splotchy on copies 169  
troubleshoot 161, 164, 165  
unclear on copies,  
troubleshoot feeding 166  
turn on and off in driver 22  
troubleshoot  
status icons 18  
storage devices  
answering machines 185  
blank pages printed 160  
bleeding colors 165  
colors 164, 165  
control panel messages 25  
copy 167  
copy quality 168  
cut-off pages, incorrect text  
or graphics  
connect 61  
USB flash drives  
supported 213  
storage environment  
specifications 212  
streaks, troubleshoot  
copies 169  
troubleshoot 169  
unclear scans 173  
scan 173  
tone dialing 81  
placement 161  
stripes on scans,  
troubleshoot 172  
subscriber identification code 79  
supplies  
Toolbox (Windows)  
about 91  
embedded Web server 187  
fax 174  
administrator settings 89  
Estimated Ink Level tab 92  
features 86  
Information tab 92  
opening 91  
fax dial tone test failed 178  
fax hardware test failed 175  
fax line test failed 179  
fax phone cord connection  
test failed 176  
fax phone cord type test  
failed 177  
fax tests 174  
myPrintMileage 95  
order online 198  
self-test diagnostic page 97  
status 86, 87  
Services tab 92  
transparencies 33  
tray 1  
yields 208  
support. See customer support  
symbols, enter 28  
system requirements 209  
capacity 36  
load media 38  
fax wall jack test, failed 175  
firewalls 159  
locating 13  
HP Instant Support 94  
ink not filling text or  
graphics 164  
ink smearing 163  
installation 188  
meaningless characters  
print 163  
media not picked up from  
tray 166  
memory cards 186  
missing lines or dots 165  
missing or incorrect  
information 161  
multiple pages are  
picked 166  
network configuration  
page 98  
nothing prints 158  
paper-feed problems 165  
power 158  
media sizes supported 33  
media types and weights  
supported 36  
T
technical information  
copy specifications 211  
fax specifications 211  
memory card  
tray 2  
capacity 36  
installation 21  
load media 39  
locating 13  
media sizes supported 33  
media types and weights  
supported 36  
specifications 213  
scan specifications 212  
telephone customer support 200  
telephone line, answer ring  
pattern 80  
telephone wall jack, fax 175  
telephone, fax from  
receive 73  
order online 198  
troubleshoot installation 165  
turn on and off in driver 22  
trays  
send 71  
temperature specifications 212  
tests, fax  
capacities 36  
clear jams 192  
installation tray 2 21  
load media 37  
locating 13  
dial tone, failed 178  
failed 174  
fax line condition 179  
fax phone cord type test  
failed 177  
hardware, failed 175  
port connection, failed 176  
setup 83  
print 158  
print quality 162  
printheads 159  
receive faxes 180, 182  
scan 169  
locking 40  
management tools 87  
media sizes supported 33  
media types and weights  
supported 36  
scan quality 171  
self-test diagnostic page 96  
telephone wall jack 175  
paper guides illustration 13  
237  
send faxes 180, 182, 184  
skewed copies 169  
skewed pages 166  
slow print 160  
SecureEasySetup  
(SES) 133  
security 134  
W
wall jack test, fax 175  
warning messages 25  
warranty 203  
set up 129  
tips 157  
tray 2 installation 165  
TWAIN  
set up on Mac OS 133  
settings 130  
turn off 134  
Web sites  
accessibilty information 12  
Apple 129  
scan from 55  
unable to activate  
source 171  
wizard 131  
wireless connection icons  
ad hoc 18  
customer support 200  
environmental  
programs 228  
two-line display, control  
panel 19  
Two-sided button 17  
two-sided printing 48  
two-sided printing accessory.  
See duplexer  
no connection exists 18  
Wireless Setup Wizard 100  
European ink cartridges 199  
HP Web Jetadmin 94  
material safety data  
sheets 229  
order supplies and  
accessories 198  
X
xD-Picture memory card  
insert 58  
recycling 229  
slot, locating 14, 58  
supply yield data sheet 208  
wireless security 131  
Webscan 55  
white bands or stripes,  
troubleshoot  
copies 168, 169  
scans 172  
WIA (Windows Image  
Application), scan from 55  
Windows  
U
uninstall software  
Mac OS 141  
Z
Zoom in button 17  
Zoom out button 17  
Windows 140  
USB cable, order 198  
USB connection  
Bluetooth adapter 135  
digital cameras 59  
features available 19  
port, locating 13, 15  
setup Mac OS 128  
setup Windows 125  
specifications 208  
USB flash drives 213  
Add Printer installation 128  
Bluetooth 136  
borderless printing 42  
duplexing 48  
HP Photosmart Software 26  
HP Solution Center 26  
install software 125  
network setup 127  
print on special or custom-  
sized media 41  
V
vertical stripes on copies,  
troubleshoot 168  
videos  
print action photos 67  
view  
print settings 47  
set up wireless  
blocked fax numbers 78  
fax log 85  
network settings 100  
photos 62  
communication 132  
sharing device 126  
system requirements 209  
turn accessories on and off  
in driver 22  
speed-dial entries 46  
voice mail  
uninstall software 140  
Windows Image Application  
(WIA), scan from 55  
wireless communication  
Bluetooth 135  
set up with fax (parallel  
phone systems) 110  
set up with fax and  
computer modem  
(parallel phone  
systems) 122  
Ethernet setup 132  
radio, turn off 100  
reducing interference 134  
regulatory information 219  
voltage specifications 212  
238  
© 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.  
www.hp.com  

Briggs Stratton 233400 User Manual
Bryant 538MAC User Manual
Bryant 542D User Manual
Carrier 50TC User Manual
Friedrich RC 21 User Manual
Frigidaire FRA103BT1 Window Air Conditioner 2020215A0320 User Manual
Goldstar M5203R User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools 98239 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard DESKJET 1050 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard OFFICEJET PRO 8000 A809 User Manual